This is the multi-page printable view of this section. Click here to print.

Return to the regular view of this page.

DevOps Tools

We provide a service that easily integrates and configures application and system development environments on a platform.

1 - DevOps Service

1.1 - Overview

Service Overview

DevOps Service is a service that provides standardized development tools, code‑framework‑based development templates, and integrated management functions for application and system development, deployment, and operation through the DevOps Console. This enables fast and reliable software development, deployment, and operation, and allows convenient integrated management of Samsung Cloud Platform resources and CI/CD tools within the DevOps Workflow.

Features

  • Convenient Code Management and Deployment: Users can conveniently manage everything from source code management to build and deployment via a web-based console. It also supports integration with various tools to analyze source code and improve quality.
  • Flexible Deployment Options: Minimize user service downtime and provide deployment environment configurations for k8s clusters or Virtual Machines, allowing users to configure deployments that fit their services and offering flexible deployment methods.
  • Repository for Deployment Management: Provides a repository that can manage source code, libraries, application artifacts, container images, and other assets for the deployment management of user services.

Service Architecture Diagram

Architecture diagram
Figure. DevOps Service Architecture Diagram

Provided features

DevOps Service integrates standard development tools to easily set up the development environment and provides convenience for build/deployment, offering the following features.

  • Continuous Integration and Deployment (CI/CD Continuous Integration/Continuous Deployment): Users can access tools responsible for source code repositories, artifact repositories, code analysis, image registries, and build/deployment with a single login.
  • Application template-based project configuration: Users can easily set up a project using a wizard approach with a template that reflects development standards.
  • Major Development Languages and Frameworks Provided: Users can select the development languages (Java, C#, Python, Ruby, etc.) and frameworks (SpringBoot, Vue.js, .Net, etc.) required for application development to configure a project for building/deployment.
  • Automated Build/Deployment Pipeline Configuration: Users can automatically generate pipeline scripts using the build/deployment pipeline template included in the application template, or configure each stage of the pipeline through a GUI-based interface.
  • Support for Various Deployment Strategies and Rollback: Users can use deployment strategies (RollingUpdate, Blue-Green) to minimize downtime of running applications, and can roll back to the desired version with a single click. If a user wants to use a Virtual Server as the deployment environment, they can deploy to the Virtual Server as a packaged file or a Docker image.
  • Custom Release Process Support: Users can define and repeatedly execute various release processes, taking into account the type of application changes.

Components

Users can easily use the DevOps Service through the Samsung Cloud Platform DevOps Console.

DevOps Console

DevOps Console provides integrated support for the tools required for application development and build/deployment, allowing easy management of project configuration and build/deployment.

  • Dev.Starter: An application template that provides integrated templates required for build and deployment, as well as sample code reflecting development standards.
  • Source Code Repository (Source Code Repository): Supports integration with source code configuration management tools. Can be linked with Git Repository.
  • Artifact Repository (Artifact Repository): Supports integration with an artifact repository for storing libraries needed for application builds and application artifacts.
  • Code Quality (Code Review): Supports integration with code quality tools that can measure and manage source code quality through static code analysis.
  • Helm Chart Repository (Helm Chart Repository): In Kubernetes, Helm charts are used to install and upgrade software easily. To install software, users must create Helm charts themselves. ChartMuseum is provided as the default repository for managing Helm charts. Integration with other chart repository tools is also supported.
  • Image Registry: Supports integration with an image registry for storing container images.
  • VM server group: a collection of Virtual Servers that serve as the deployment target for an application. Users can register Virtual Servers in the DevOps Console and designate them as deployment targets.
  • Kubernetes Cluster: The cluster that serves as the deployment target for applications. Users can register a Kubernetes Cluster in the DevOps Console and designate it as a deployment target.

Provision status by region

The DevOps Service is available in the environments below.

regionProvision status
Korea West (kr-west1)Provide
Korea East (kr-east1)Provide
South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Provide
South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Provide
South Korea 3 (kr-south3)Provide
Table. DevOps Service availability by region

Preliminary Service

The DevOps Service has no prerequisite services.

1.2 - How-to guides

The user can create the service by entering the required information for the DevOps Service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console. Additionally, by using the DevOps Service’s standardized development tools, code, framework-based development templates, and integrated management features, the user can efficiently carry out development projects.

Reference
After creating the DevOps Serivce service, to configure the CI/CD environment in the DevOps Console, you need to use the Kubernetes Engine service and the Container Registry service.

Create DevOps Service

You can create and use a DevOps Service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Reference
  • Each account can use one DevOps Service.
  • Only IAM users can create the DevOps Service.
  • When creating a DevOps Service, the creator’s ID is granted Tenant Admin privileges in the DevOps Console.

To create a DevOps Service, follow these steps.

  1. From the All Services > DevOps Tools > DevOps Service menu, click the Create Service button. You will be taken to the Service Home page of the DevOps Service.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the DevOps Service Create button. You will be taken to the DevOps Service Create page.
  3. On the DevOps Service Creation page, enter the information required to create the service.
    • Enter the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Tenant nameRequiredTenant name of the DevOps Service created by the user
      • Name displayed logically when accessing the DevOps Console
      • Start with a lowercase English letter and use lowercase English letters, numbers, and special characters (-) to enter 3 to 30 characters
      Tenant codeRequiredID used internally by the system
      • It is an ID value used internally, similar to a project ID, generated from the value entered by the user
      • It must start with a lowercase English letter and be entered using lowercase English letters, numbers, and special characters (-) with a length of 3 to 30 characters
      Table. DevOps Service required information input items
    • In the Add Tenant Member area, select the tenant user who will use the service.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      userRequiredSelect members from the user list
      • Service applicants are included as default members of the Tenant
      • You must select at least one user to create the service
      Table. DevOps Service Tenant member addition items
    • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 can be added per resource
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. DevOps Service Additional Information Input Fields
  4. Verify the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the summary panel, and click the Create button.
    • Once creation is complete, check the created resource on the Resource List page.

Using DevOps Service

The DevOps Service can configure an actual DevOps environment in a separate console called DevOps Console.

To use the DevOps Service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > DevOps Tools > DevOps Service menu. Go to the Service Honme page of DevOps Service.
  2. From the Service Home page, click the DevOps Service menu. You will be taken to the DevOps Service list page.
  3. DevOps Service List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the DevOps Service Details page.
  4. On the DevOps Service Details page, click the DevOps Console button. You will be taken to the Samsung Cloud Platform DevOps Console page.
Reference
For detailed information on how to use the DevOps Console, see the Samsung Cloud Platform DevOps Console User Guide provided within the DevOps Console.

Check DevOps Service details

DevOps Service service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. The DevOps Service Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

To view the detailed information of the DevOps Service, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > DevOps Tools > DevOps Service menu. Navigate to the Service Honme page of DevOps Service.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the DevOps Service menu. You will be taken to the DevOps Service list page.
  3. On the DevOps Service List page, click the resource you want to view detailed information for. You will be taken to the DevOps Service Details page.
    • DevOps Service Details page displays status information and consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Status indicatorDisplay the status of the DevOps Service
      • Active: Available state
      • Creating: Creating state
      • Error: Operational error state
      DevOps ConsoleNavigate to the DevOps Console to control the service.
      Service terminationService cancellation button
      Table. DevOps Service status information and additional features

Detailed information

You can view detailed information of the selected resource on the DevOps Service List page.

CategoryDetailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
  • In the DevOps Service, it refers to the SRN for a DevOps Service resource
Resource nameResource Name
  • In the DevOps Service, it refers to the tenant name
Resource IDUnique resource ID within the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation date and time
Tenant nameUser-created Tenant name
Tenant codeSystem unique ID for the Tenant created by the user
Table. DevOps Service detailed information items

tag

DevOps Service List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Virtual Server Tag Tab Items

Work History

On the DevOps Service List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • You can view the operation date and time, resource type, resource name, operation details, operation result, operator name, and path information.
  • To perform an advanced search, click the Advanced Search button
Table. Work History Tab Detailed Information Items

Cancel DevOps Service

Reference
  • If a project in the DevOps Console has resources attached, you cannot terminate the DevOps Service.
    • To cancel the DevOps Service, delete all resources connected within the DevOps Console.
  • For detailed information on using the DevOps Console, refer to the Samsung Cloud Platform DevOps Console User Guide.

To cancel the DevOps Service, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the All Services > DevOps Tools > DevOps Service menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of the DevOps service.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the DevOps Service menu. You will be taken to the DevOps List page.
  3. On the DevOps Service List page, click the resource to cancel. You will be taken to the DevOps Service Detail page.
  4. On the DevOps Service Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
  5. When termination is complete, verify on the DevOps Service List page whether the resource has been terminated.

1.3 - API Reference

API Reference

1.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

1.5 - Release Note

2025.10.23
FEATURE Korea East(kr-east1) region service launch
  • You can also use the DevOps Service in the Korea East (kr-east1) region.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Add user member
  • Add user member
    • When creating a DevOps Service, you can add members who will perform the Admin role.
2025.02.27
FEATURE Common feature change
  • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
    • We have incorporated common CX changes, such as Account, IAM, Service Home, and tags.
2024.12.23
NEW DevOps Service official version release
  • We have launched the DevOps Service, which delivers an integrated, fast, and secure software development, deployment, and operations environment.

2 - DevOps Console

2.1 - Overview

2.1.1 - DevOps Console Introduction

Service Overview

DevOps Console integrates standard development tools, making it easy to configure development environments and providing convenience for building and deploying, with the following features.

Key tool integration and unified authentication for Continuous Integration and Deployment (CI/CD Continuous Integration/Continuous Deployment)

Users can access tools responsible for source code repositories, artifact repositories, code analysis, image repositories, and build/deployment with a single login.

Project configuration based on application template

Users can easily configure a project using a wizard-style approach with templates that incorporate development standards.

Major development languages and frameworks provided

Users can select the development languages (Java, C#, Python, Ruby, etc.) and frameworks (SpringBoot, Vue.js, .Net, etc.) required for application development to configure a project for building and deployment.

Automatic Build/Deployment Pipeline Configuration

Users can automatically generate pipeline scripts using the build/deployment pipeline templates included in the application template, or configure each pipeline stage through a GUI-based approach.

Support for multiple deployment methods and rollback

Users can employ deployment strategies (RollingUpdate, Blue-Green) to minimize downtime of running applications, and can roll back to a desired version with a single click. If users wish to use a VM server as the deployment environment, they can deploy to the VM server in the form of packaged files or Docker images.

Custom Release Process Support

Users can define and repeatedly execute various release processes, taking into account the type of application changes.

Component

Users can easily use the DevOps Service through the DevOps Console.

Component
Figure. DevOps Console Component

DevOps Console

It provides integrated support for the tools required for application development and build/deployment, allowing easy management of project configuration and build/deployment.

Dev. Starter

It is an application template that provides not only sample code reflecting development standards but also integrated templates required for build and deployment.

IDP(ID Provider)

It manages users centrally and handles authentication.

Source Code Repository

Supports integration with source code version control tools.

Artifact Repository

Supports integration with an artifact repository for storing libraries required for application builds and application artifacts.

code quality

Supports integration with code quality tools that can measure and manage source code quality through static code analysis.

Helm chart repository

In Kubernetes, Helm charts are used to easily install and upgrade software. Users must create Helm charts themselves to install software. It provides ChartMuseum as the default repository for managing Helm charts. It also supports integration with other chart repository tools.

Image Repository

Supports integration with an image registry for storing container images.

VM Server Group

A group of VM servers that serve as the deployment target for the application. Users can register VMs and designate them as deployment targets in the DevOps Console.

Kubernetes Cluster

The cluster that serves as the deployment target for the application. Users can register a Kubernetes Cluster in the DevOps Console and designate it as a deployment target.

Note
The list of tools that support integration in the current DevOps Console can be found in Tool Classification.

Key concepts and relationships

System administrators (System Admin) or administrators (Admin) must predefine the tools and application templates required when a user creates a project.

Key Concepts and Relationships
Figure. Key Concepts and Relationships

tenant

It is a logical unit that independently provides and shares tools and application templates usable in projects. The system administrator registers a tenant for each organization (or client) unit that must guarantee independence and assigns a tenant administrator. The tenant administrator can register tenant tools, application templates, and tenant members that can be used within that tenant.

Project Group

As a unit for managing individual projects, a member belonging to a specific tenant can create a project group. Therefore, a project group belongs to a single tenant and can utilize the tools and templates configured for that tenant.

project

A project is a unit that develops and manages an application or microservice that is deployed and run independently. Consequently, it is common to structure a project around a single source code repository, but it can be flexibly organized according to the characteristics of the application or the development and operations teams.

tool

It is a development tool that supports source code repositories, image registries, build/deployment pipelines, and code quality used in projects. Each project can use the tools assigned to its project group, tenant, or the Kubernetes Cluster that is the deployment target of the application. Typically, when assigned at the cluster level, the tools support build/pipelines and image registries that affect deployment speed. Tools are broadly classified into three types based on their scope of use.

  • ProjectGroup Tool: It is a tool that can be used only in projects belonging to a Project Group. Multiple Project Groups can be mapped and used. The Project Group Owner and Master register and manage it.

  • Tenant Tool: A tool that can only be used within project groups belonging to a tenant. Multiple tenants can be mapped for use. When registering the tool, only the tenant administrator of the initially registered tenant can manage it. Tenants added later to the tool can only use it. Additionally, it can be designated and managed to be usable in clusters accessible to the tenant administrator.

  • System Tool: DevOps Service is a tool that can be used as a service across the entire project. System administrators designate and manage the tenants and clusters that can be registered and used.

Application Template

This is a template that makes it easy to set up a project. A template that reflects development standards and even provides sample code is called Dev. Starter, while a template that simply supports development environment setup is called Environment Only. Like tools, it is divided into three main types based on the scope of use.

  • Project Group Template: A template that can be used only by projects belonging to a project group. The project group Owner and Master register and manage it.

  • Tenant Template: This is a template that can only be used by project groups belonging to a tenant. It is registered and managed by the tenant administrator.

  • System Template: This template can be used across all projects in DevOps Service. It designates and manages the tenants that system administrators can register and use.

2.1.2 - Roles

Project group roles and permissions

  • The project group creator has Owner permission by default.
  • Master lacks the project group deletion permission among the Owner’s permissions.
  • Developers and Viewers have view‑only permissions.
CategoryPermissionOwnerMasterDeveloperViewer
Project GroupLookup
Project GroupEdit
Project GroupDelete
projectCreate
ProjectLookup
MemberAdd
memberLookup
MemberDelete
Table. Permissions for each role within the project group

Project roles and permissions

  • They are classified as Owner, Master, Developer, and Viewer.
  • Viewer can only view.
  • Developers can create or delete development-related functions.
    • Example) build pipeline, Helm chart, deployment
  • Owner/Master can view, create, and delete all functions within a project.
  • The project role holder inherits the role holder of the project group.
  • Even if you are not registered as a project member, you can perform the role in the project if you are a member of the project group.
  • When a user’s project role and project group role differ, the project role takes precedence.
    • In other words, you can restrict permissions for a specific project among the members of a project group.
  • Example) If you do not want to grant Master permissions to the Master role holder of a project group for a specific project, register them as a project member and assign Developer or Viewer permissions.

CategoryPermissionOwnerMasterDeveloperViewer
DashboardLookup
Build pipelineLookup
Build pipelineImport
Build pipeline(development) create/add
Build pipeline(development) run
Build pipeline(Development) Fix
Build pipeline(development) delete
Build pipeline(Operation) Create/Add
Build pipeline(operation) execution
Build pipeline(Operation) Edit
Build pipeline(Operation) Delete
helm install(development) install
helm install(Operation) Installation
ProjectEdit
ProjectDelete
Table. Permissions by role within the project (1)

Daegu divisionSubcategoryPermissionOwnerMasterDeveloperViewer
Kubernetes deploymentHelm release(development) lookup
Kubernetes deploymentHelm release(development) upgrade
Kubernetes deploymentHelm release(development) rollback
Kubernetes deploymentHelm release(development) delete
Kubernetes deploymentHelm release(Operation) Lookup
Kubernetes deploymentHelm release(Operation) Upgrade
Kubernetes deploymentHelm release(Production) Rollback
Kubernetes deploymentHelm release(operation) Delete
Kubernetes deploymentHelm releaseImport
Kubernetes deploymentIngress/ServiceCreate/Update/Delete
Kubernetes deploymentBlue/Green(development) create/modify/delete
Kubernetes deploymentBlue/Green(Operations) Create/Update/Delete
Kubernetes deploymentCanary(development) lookup
Kubernetes deploymentCanary(Development) Create/Delete
Kubernetes deploymentCanary(Operation) Query
Kubernetes deploymentCanary(Operation) Create
Kubernetes deploymentCanary(Operation) Delete
Kubernetes deploymentIstio(development) query
Kubernetes deploymentIstio(development) create/modify/delete
Kubernetes deploymentIstio(Operation) Lookup
Kubernetes deploymentIstio(Operation) Create/Edit
Kubernetes deploymentIstio(Operation) Delete
Kubernetes deploymentWorkload(development) query
Kubernetes deploymentworkload(Development) Create/Delete/Rollback
Kubernetes deploymentworkload(Operation) Lookup
Kubernetes deploymentWorkload(Operational) Create/Rollback
Kubernetes deploymentWorkload(Operation) Delete
Code repository/Code quality/Artifact repository/Image repositoryAllLookup
Code repository/Code quality/Artifact repository/Image repositoryAllCreate
Code repository/Code quality/Artifact repository/Image repositoryAllDelete
Table. Permissions by role within the project (2)

  • Jenkins system permissions
    • Access permissions are granted based on the project permission hierarchy of DevOps Console.
    • Permissions are assigned to the Jenkins pipeline based on the project’s role assignments.
    • For tools other than Jenkins, you can set permissions in the tool’s menu.

CategoryPermissionOwnerMasterDeveloperViewer
(Folder) Project GroupFolder view
(folder) projectCredential lookup
(folder) projectCreate/Update/Delete credentials
(folder) projectFolder view
(folder) projectCreate folder
(folder) projectFolder Settings
(folder) projectDelete folder
(folder) type(Development) Folder Lookup
(folder) type(Development) Create pipeline
(folder) type(development) folder settings
(folder) type(Development) Delete folder
(folder) type(Production) Folder Lookup
(folder) type(Production) Pipeline creation
(folder) type(Production) Folder Settings
(folder) type(Operation) Delete folder
pipeline(Development) View Pipeline
pipeline(Development) Pipeline Configuration
pipeline(Development) Delete pipeline
pipeline(development) pipeline build
pipeline(Production) Pipeline Lookup
pipeline(Production) Pipeline Configuration
pipeline(Production) Delete pipeline
pipeline(Production) Pipeline Build
Table. Jenkins system permissions by role within the project

System roles and permissions

Daegu divisionSubcategoryPermissionSystem AdministratorAdministrator
(Tenant Manager)
User
(Project Group Owner)
toolSystem toolRegister/Edit/Delete
ToolSystem toolAdd/Modify supported tenant
toolSystem toolDelete supported tenant
toolSystem toolAdd/Modify supported cluster
toolSystem toolDelete supported cluster
toolTenant toolRegister/Edit/Delete
toolTenant toolAdd/Modify/Delete supported tenant
toolProject Group ToolRegister/Edit/Delete
toolProject Group ToolAdd/Modify/Delete supported tenant
Table. System Roles and Permissions(1)
Daegu divisionSubcategoryPermissionSystem AdministratorAdministrator
(Tenant Manager)
User
(Project Group Owner)
App. TemplateSystem templateRegister/Edit/Delete
App. TemplateSystem templateAdd/Modify supported tenant
App. TemplateSystem templateDelete supported tenant
App. TemplateSystem templateAdd/Modify/Delete Supported Images
App. TemplateSystem templateAdd/Modify/Delete supported Helm charts
App. TemplateTenant templateRegister/Edit/Delete
App. TemplateTenant templateAdd/Modify/Delete supported images
App. TemplateTenant templateAdd/Modify/Delete supported Helm charts
App. TemplateProject Group TemplateRegister/Edit/Delete
App. TemplateProject Group TemplateAdd/Modify/Delete Supported Images
App. TemplateProject Group TemplateAdd/Modify/Delete supported Helm charts
Helm chart managementSystem Helm chartAdd/Edit/Delete
Helm chart managementTenant Helm chartAdd/Edit/Delete
Helm chart managementProject group Helm chartAdd/Edit/Delete
Project GroupAllCreate
Table. System Roles and Permissions(2)

2.1.3 - Screen Configuration

Describes the main menu pages of DevOps Console.

When you first log in, the top menu and all project groups and projects you have permission for are displayed.

Top menu

Through the top menu, you can navigate to the Main screen, Management screen, etc., and edit user information. The top menu is always displayed while using DevOps Console.

ItemExplanation
Main pageGo to the main page.
managementNavigate to the admin page.
SupportYou can view the guide, inquiries, and announcements.
LinkYou can view the related system links.
User InformationYou can view and edit user information or log out.
  • Account Information: A popup showing the user’s account information opens.
  • Registration Information: The registration information page opens.
  • Authentication Key Management: Manage each user’s authentication keys.
  • My Activity Log: You can view the user’s activity history.
  • Log Out: Log out from the DevOps Console.
Table. Top menu items

Main Page

Displays the status of all project groups and projects for which the user has permissions.

ItemExplanation
Create project groupYou can create a new project group.
Project group nameIndicates the project group name.
Tenant nameRepresents the tenant name.
Project Group ManagementNavigate to the project group page.
Release ManagementGo to the release management page.
Create projectYou can create a new project.
Project DetailsAll projects the user has permission for are displayed
  • Click to go to the project’s Dashboard page
Go to the user guideGo to the user guide page.
Table. Main page items

Admin Page

It includes overall management functions of the DevOps Console, such as dashboard, tenant, project, tool, and user.

ItemExplanation
Management menuDevOps Console These are the management feature menus.
  • Menus appear differently depending on permissions.
Table. Management Page Items

Project Group Management Page

This is the management page for project groups and releases.

ItemExplanation
Project Group Management MenuThis is the project group management menu.
Release Management MenuThis is the release management menu.
Table. Project Group Management Page Items

Project page

This is a page about the project.

ItemExplanation
Project Management MenuThis is the project management menu.
Table. Project Management Page Items

2.2 - Getting Started

2.2.1 - Getting Started with DevOps Console

Describes how to log in to the DevOps Console and set the display language and user information.

Sign up

To use DevOps Console, you need to create a DevOps Console account that is separate from Samsung Cloud Platform, and you can create the account through sign‑up.

To create an account in DevOps Console, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Sign Up link on the login page. You will be taken to the sign‑up page.
  2. Please proceed with Identity verification. When identity verification is complete, click the Next button.
    Item
    Required status
    Explanation
    Auto Input PreventionRequiredEnter the characters displayed in the image into the input field.
    Table. Authentication Information
  3. Please agree to the terms of the Sign-up Information item.
    Item
    Required status
    Explanation
    Terms of ServiceRequiredCheck if the service terms are agreed
    Privacy PolicyRequiredCheck consent for collection and use of personal information
    Must be at least 14 years old.RequiredCheck whether the user is 14 or older.
    Table. Sign-up Information Input
  4. Enter the required information for the Member Information field.
    Item
    Whether required
    Explanation
    User ID (email)RequiredEmail to be used as the subscriber ID
    mobile phone numberRequiredEnter mobile phone number
    • Enter the mobile phone number and click the OTP Send button to generate an OTP
    • Enter the OTP number received on the mobile phone and click the Verify button
    • If the OTP is valid, mobile phone number verification is completed
    PasswordRequiredThe password that the subscriber can use must be entered within 8 to 20 characters
    • User ID or name cannot be used as the password
    • Must include at least one uppercase letter (English), one lowercase letter (English), one digit, and one special character (! @ # $ % ^ & *)
    • The same character cannot be used three or more times
    • Sequences of four or more consecutive letters or numbers are not allowed
    • Password change interval: 90 days
    Confirm PasswordRequiredConfirm the password the subscriber will use
    NameRequiredSubscriber name
    • Can be entered using letters, numbers, and spaces, up to 100 characters
    languageRequiredNotification language settings for email, SMS, etc.
    Time zoneRequiredSet user’s timezone information
    Table. Member Information Input
  5. After entering all the information, click the Complete button, and a verification email will be sent to the entered email address.
    • Click the Email address verification button in the received email to complete registration.

Log in

To log in to DevOps Console, enter your account information on the login page and click the Next button.

After entering the OTP number issued for the selected OTP type on the OTP authentication page, click the Login button.

If you cannot remember your ID or password, click the ID/Password Recovery link, locate your account information first, and then attempt to log in.

After logging in, the DevOps Console main page opens.

Caution

If you enter the password incorrectly more than five times, your account will be locked, so please enter it correctly.

To unlock your account, click the ID/Password Recovery link to reset your password.

Edit User Information

To edit user information, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Shortcut icon at the upper right of the Main page.
  2. DevOps IDP Click the link. DevOps IDP page opens in a new tab.
  3. You can change information such as mobile phone number, password, name, timezone, and language on the user information page.
Information
The timezone and language settings of DevOps IDP are not synchronized with DevOps Console.

To modify the information used in DevOps Console, follow these steps.

  1. Click the User icon in the top menu of the Main page.
  2. Click the Account Information menu. The Account Information popup window opens.
  3. After changing the language and time zone information, click the Save button to complete updating your account information.

Changing Console Language

To change the language displayed in DevOps Console, after logging in, click Language Settings located below the DevOps Console page to select the desired language.

Manage authentication keys

Information
The authentication key is used when accessing the Open API service of DevOps Console.

You can manage each user’s individual authentication keys through the Authentication Key Management menu after clicking the User icon in the top menu of the Main page.

Add authentication key

To add an authentication key, follow these steps.

  1. Click the User icon at the top right of the Main page.
  2. Click the Authentication Key Management menu. The Authentication Key Management popup window opens.
  3. Click the Create Authentication Key button. The Create Authentication Key popup will appear.
  4. After setting the expiration date, click the Save button to complete the creation of the authentication key.
Information
If an authentication key has already been added, you cannot add another one.

Configure security settings

You can restrict the IPs that are allowed to use this authentication key through security settings.

To add security settings, follow these steps.

  1. Click the User icon at the top right of the Main page.
  2. Click the Authentication Key Management menu. The Authentication Key Management popup window opens.
  3. Click the Security Settings tab, then click the Edit button. The Change Security Settings popup window opens.
  4. Set IP access control to use.
  5. After entering the allowed IP, click the Save button to complete the security settings.

Delete authentication key

To delete the authentication key, follow these steps.

  1. Click the User icon at the top right of the Main page.
  2. Click the Authentication Key Management menu. The Authentication Key Management popup window opens.
  3. Click the Status Change button.
  4. When the Authentication Key Status Change popup opens, process it as Unused and click the Save button.
  5. Click the Delete button to complete the authentication key deletion.
Information
Authentication keys that are in use cannot be deleted. Change them to Unused status before deletion.

Check My Activity History

If you click the User Icon > My Activity History menu in the top menu of the Main page, you can view your DevOps Console activity history.

Configure Access Control IP

You can register IP addresses that are allowed to access the DevOps Console to control access.

Follow these steps to register an access control IP.

  1. Click the Main page’s top‑right shortcut icon.
  2. DevOps IDP Click the link. DevOps IDP page opens in a new tab.
  3. Click the Access Control menu in the left menu.
  4. On the Access Control page, click the Edit button below. You will be taken to the Access Control Edit page.
  5. Set Access Control IP Settings to Enable.
  6. After adding the IP to allow access, click the Save button to complete the access control settings.
Information
If the IP has changed or is incorrectly registered making access impossible, you can click the Access Control IP Settings link below the login page to change the settings.

Delete Account

Caution
DevOps Console When the account is deleted, all permissions related to the collected user information and resources are terminated.

To delete your DevOps Console account, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Main page’s top‑right shortcut icon.
  2. DevOps IDP Click the link. DevOps IDP page opens in a new tab.
  3. On the user information page, click the Delete Account button at the top right. The Delete Account popup will appear.
  4. Enter your current password in the input field, then click the Delete Account button to complete the deletion.

2.2.1.1 - Registration Information

Users can view and manage their basic information, authentication information, subscribed tenants, subscribed project groups, and subscribed projects.

Getting Started with Sign-up Information

To start managing your registration information, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon in the upper right. Navigate to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Please click the Sign-up Information menu in the left menu. It navigates to the Sign-up Information page.

Managing authentication information

Authentication information automatically saves the credentials the user used for tool registration, usage, and related activities. If necessary, you can add new credentials, or modify or delete existing credentials.

To manage authentication information, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Registration Information menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Registration Information page.
  3. On the Registration Information page, click the Authentication Information tab.

Add authentication information

To add authentication information, follow these steps.

  1. In the Credentials tab, click the Add button. The Add Credentials popup opens.
  2. Add Authentication Info Enter the information in the popup window.
  3. All tools and URLs that the user can access are displayed.
  4. After completing the information entry, click the Connection Test button.
  5. Click the Save button.

Modify authentication information

To modify the authentication information, follow these steps.

  1. In the Authentication Information tab, click the authentication information you want to edit. The Edit Authentication Information popup will open.
  2. Edit Authentication Information After entering the information in the popup window, click the Connection Test button.
  3. Save button is enabled, click the Save button.

Delete authentication information

To delete the credentials, follow these steps.

  1. In the Credential tab, select the checkbox of the credential you want to delete.
  2. Click the Delete button in the Authentication information list.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.
Caution
If the authentication information is in use, it cannot be deleted.

Manage Subscribed Tenants

Users can view the list of tenants they have joined.
You can also request to join a new tenant, and you can leave a tenant you are already a member of.

To manage the tenant you have joined, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Sign-up Information menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Sign-up Information page.
  3. On the Registration Info page, click the Registered Tenant tab.

Request tenant registration

To request tenant enrollment, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Join button in the Joined Tenant tab. The Tenant Join Request popup window opens.
  2. Tenant Registration Request In the popup window, enter the tenant code you wish to register and click the Search icon.
  3. Enter the request reason and click the Add button.
  4. After selecting the permissions of the added tenant, click the Save button.
  5. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup.

Leave tenant

To withdraw from the tenant, follow the steps below.

  1. In the Joined Tenants tab, select the checkbox of the tenant you wish to withdraw.
  2. Click the Delete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.

Manage Joined Project Groups

Users can view the list of project groups they have joined.

To manage the project groups you have joined, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Sign-up Information menu. You will be taken to the Sign-up Information page.
  3. On the Sign-up Information page, click the Joined Project Group tab.

When you click a project group in the project group list, you are taken to the Project Group Management page.

For detailed information on project group management, please refer to the Project Group Overview.

Manage Joined Projects

Users can view the list of projects they have joined.

To manage the projects you have joined, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Sign-up Information menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Sign-up Information page.
  3. On the Sign-up Information page, click the Joined Projects tab.

When you click a project in the project list, you are taken to the Project Management page.

For detailed information about the project, see the 프로젝트.

2.2.2 - Tutorial (From Project Creation to Build/Deploy)

Through the following steps, the user can create a DevOps Console project, build the source to create an image, and deploy the Helm chart to a Kubernetes cluster.

Create Project Group

Users can create a project group. Users must be a member of the tenant where they will create the project group.

Create Project Group

To create a project group, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Create Project Group and Start button or the Create Project Group button. The Create Project Group popup opens.
  2. After entering the items, click the Save button to complete the creation of the project group.
Reference
  • Approval from the tenant administrator may be required.
  • If there are no selectable tenants, click the Tenant Registration Shortcut link to proceed with tenant registration.

Register Tenant

To join a tenant, follow these steps.

  1. In the Create Project Group popup, click the Tenant Join Shortcut link. The Tenant Join Request popup opens.
  2. Enter the tenant code to register in the Tenant Search field accurately and click the Search icon. The tenant information will be retrieved.
  3. Verify that the displayed tenant is correct, enter the request reason, and click the Add button. It will be added to the list below.
  4. After selecting the permissions for the tenant added to the list below, click the Save button.

(Helm chart deployment)Create a project

Reference
  • Users must be members of a project group and tenant to be able to create projects.
  • Refer to Creating a Project Group for how to join a project group and tenant.

Users can create a project that deploys an application to a specific Kubernetes cluster using App.Template, Helm Chart, and Tool Management.

Start Project Creation

To start creating a project, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Create Project button. The Create Project page opens.

Enter basic information

Enter the basic information of the project. The project name and project ID must be unique and cannot be duplicated.

To enter the basic information, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Project Creation page, select the App. Template Utilization option of the Project Configuration Method item.
  2. For the deployment target field, select Kubernetes.
  3. After entering additional content, click the Start button.
    ItemExplanation
    Project namePlease enter the project name.
    Project IDPlease enter the project ID.
    Project configuration methodSelect a project configuration method
    • Use App template: select a pre‑provided App template.
    • Manual configuration: configure without an App template.
    deployment targetSelect deployment target
    • Kubernetes: Deploy the application to a Kubernetes cluster.
    • Kubernetes(ArgoCD): Deploy the application to a Kubernetes cluster using ArgoCD.
    • VM(Artifact): Deploy the application to a VM server.
    • VM(Docker): Package the application as a Docker image and deploy it to a VM server.
    • N/A: Choose this when you do not deploy the build output.
    K8S clusterSelect the target cluster for deployment
    • DevOps Console Only clusters that the user has access rights to can be selected among the K8S clusters.
    namespaceSelect the target namespace for deployment
    • Only namespaces that the user has access rights to, among the clusters retrieved from the K8S cluster, can be selected.
    Table. Project creation basic information entry items

Select Application Template

Note
For detailed information about the application template, see App.템플릿.

The user can select an application template to configure the project.

If you create a project based on an application template that includes sample source code, you can view the application that will be deployed.

In contrast, using a template labeled Environment Only configures only the build/deployment environment without sample source code.

If you configure a project using an already set up source code repository, select the template marked Environment Only.

To start selecting an application template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Application Template screen, enter the template name, select the application template card you want, and then click.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    FilterYou can easily find application templates using predefined filters.
    searchYou can easily find application templates through search.
    Table. Project Creation Application Template Items

Set up the code repository

Users can configure a repository for managing source code through the code repository setup step.

Create new repository and use existing repository activation conditions differ depending on the application template and tool.

Repository typeApp with source code. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
App with source code included. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Source code not included (EnvironmentOnly)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
Source code not included (Environment Only)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Create new repositoryXX
Use existing repositoryXX
Table. Conditions for creating a new repository and enabling use of existing repository

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the code repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code repository item, select the Code repository type.
  2. Select Create new repository or Use existing repository, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the code repository to use
    • Registered tool: The user can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tool: You can enter the domain of an unregistered tool to use it. The unregistered tool entry appears only when the source code is not included (Environment Only) App. Template.
    New/Existing usagePlease select New repository creation or whether to use an existing repository.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication information
    • If you do not have an account, Don’t have an account? click the link to open the Account Creation Information popup where you can create an account.
    • After creating a new account, be sure to change your password via the Set Initial Password link.
    (Unregistered tool)
    Repository information
    Enter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • Click the URL Check button to undergo an additional verification process.
    Table. Project Creation Code Repository Settings

Configure code quality

Users can configure a repository for quality management.

To set code quality, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code Quality item, select Repository Type.
  2. Enter Basic Information and Authentication Information, then click the Connection Test button.
  3. Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • The types of Code Quality tools available to the user are displayed.
    New / Existing / Unused statusSelect repository creation method
    • If you select Create new repository, you must enter the quality project name/quality project key.
    • If you select Do not create, you can proceed directly to the next step.
    Base URLSelect the SonarQube URL.
    Quality Project NameEnter the name of the SonarQube project.
    Quality Project KeyEnter the Key of the SonarQube project.
    authentication informationEnter authentication credentials
    • You can create a new user or use existing authentication credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Code Quality Settings

Configure image repository

Users can configure a repository to store the built container images through the image repository configuration step.

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the image repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Image Repository item, select the Repository Type.
  2. Create new repository / Use existing repository select, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository type to use
    • The types of Image Registry tools available to the user are displayed.
    Repository informationSelect the repository creation method.
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed with the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter your credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Image Repository Settings

Configure the deployment target environment

Users can deploy by directly configuring via Helm charts.

Helm release name and Helm chart when selected, the Helm chart installation options and the default Values.yaml entries included in the chart are displayed.

Available Helm charts are associated with the App template. You can edit or delete them through Manage supported Helm charts.

To set the deployment target environment, follow these steps.

  1. In the Deployment target field, select Configure directly via Helm chart.
  2. Please enter the Helm release name.
  3. Click the Search button to select the Helm chart to use.
  4. After editing Values.yaml, click the Validation Check button.
  5. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    deployment targetPlease select the deployment target.
    Helm release nameEnter the name of the Helm release to create.
    • The name must be unique within the namespace of the target cluster.
    Helm chartSelect a Helm chart.
    • When a Helm chart is selected, detailed information about the chosen chart is displayed below
    K8S informationShows the information of the Kubernetes cluster required for configuring Value.yaml.
    Values. yamlEdit the contents of Values.yaml.
    • values.yaml file to be used when installing the Helm chart.
    Table. Project creation deployment target environment configuration items

Setting up the Build Pipeline

Users can configure pipelines that build and deploy applications.

You can view each stage of the pipeline to be configured and rename the build job.

To set up the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Build Pipeline screen branches based on IDP integration status.
    • For IDP-integrated Jenkins, click the User Check button to perform User Registration Confirmation.
    • For Jenkins not integrated with IDP, enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    Item
    Explanation
    Build/Deployment pipelineDisplays build/deployment pipeline information.
    • The build/deployment pipeline is displayed based on the information registered in the App template’s Manage Pipeline Templates.
    CategorySelect the development/operation distinction.
    • The permissions for the pipeline vary according to the development/operation distinction.
    URLSelect Jenkins to configure the pipeline, then enter the job name.
    • The Jenkins instances available to the user are displayed.
    Build AgentSelect the agent to be used for pipeline builds.
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment in which the build agent runs.
    User informationIDP Integrated Jenkins
    • Click the User Check button to verify user registration.
    • If you are not registered as a Jenkins user, when the User Registration Guide popup appears, click the Go to Jenkins link to proceed with User Sign‑Up or Initial Jenkins Login.
    IDP Non‑Integrated Jenkins
    • Enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
    Set environment variablesSet the environment variables to be registered in the Jenkins pipeline.
    Image Tag PatternSelect the tag assignment method for the container image.
    Deploy StrategySelect the deployment method for the container image.
    Recipient of deployment resultsSelect the user who will receive the results after the build pipeline completes.
    Table. Project creation build pipeline configuration items

Customize Settings

The user can specify and modify the path of the Dockerfile file used for the build.

Additionally, you can view the final script generated based on the information configured in 빌드 파이프라인 설정하기 and also edit it.

Dockerfile, follow these steps to configure the pipeline script.

  1. After entering information on the Custom settings page, click the Connection Test button.
  2. Click the Next button when the Next button is enabled.
    ItemExplanation
    Dockerfile configurationCreate New Dockerfile or Use Existing Dockerfile. Please select.
    • «Use Existing Dockerfile is only selectable after choosing the Environment Only App template and, in 코드 저장소 설정하기, selecting Use Existing Repository.
    Dockerfile pathSpecify the Dockerfile file path in the source code.
    Branch nameThe branch name is automatically registered when you set it in Code Repository Configuration.
    DockerfileCheck and modify the contents of the Dockerfile.
    pipeline scriptCheck and modify the pipeline script.
    Table. Project Creation Custom Settings Items
Note
For detailed information about Jenkins pipeline scripts, see the official site.

Complete project creation

The user can review the project and tool information to be created and start project creation.

To complete project creation, follow the steps below.

  1. Summary Information After checking the information on the screen, click the Complete button.
  2. Project Creation popup window opens and the project creation proceeds.
  3. After the project creation is complete, click the Confirm button to go to the Project page.
Notice
It cannot be canceled during creation, and when the project is created successfully, the Confirm button becomes active.

Check Build Pipeline Execution

On the Project page, you can view the pipeline execution status, and once the initial project creation is complete, the build pipeline runs automatically.

If the build pipeline fails, use the left Build Pipeline menu to modify and rerun the pipeline.

To verify the build pipeline execution, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Build Pipeline menu in the left menu.

Check deployment results

After the pipeline finishes running, you can check the Helm chart deployment results.

For detailed information about the Helm chart deployment results, refer to the Helm release.

To verify the deployment results, follow the steps below.

  1. Main page, click the Project card. Project Dashboard page will be displayed.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. Click the Helm Release list to view detailed deployment results.

2.2.2.1 - Add Build/Deploy (Helm Chart Deployment)

The user can, through the following steps, create a new build pipeline in an already created DevOps Console project, build the source to create an image, and perform Helm chart deployment to a Kubernetes cluster.

Through Helm install, the deployed Helm release will be used in Deploy to K8S stage configuration.

Getting Started with Build/Deploy Additions

To begin adding build and deployment, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.

Add code repository (Option)

Reference
Proceed only if a new code repository is needed.

Repository typeApp with source code. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
App with source code included. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Source code not included (EnvironmentOnly)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
Source code not included (Environment Only)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Create new repositoryXX
Use existing repositoryXX
Table. Conditions for creating a new repository and enabling use of existing repository

To add a code repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click Repository > Code Repository in the left menu.
  3. Click the Add Code Repository button at the top right. The Add Code Repository page opens.
  4. Enter/set each item and click the Connection Test button.
  5. Click the Save button to complete Add code repository.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • Registered tool: The user can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tool: You can enter the domain of a tool that will not be registered to use it. The unregistered tool option appears only for App templates that do not include source code (Environment Only).
    New/Existing usageSelect Create new repository or Use existing repository
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication credentials.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • Click the URL Check button to proceed with the verification process.
    Table. Code Repository Configuration Items

Add image repository (Option)

Note
Proceed only if a new image repository is needed.

To add an image repository, follow these steps.

App. Add image repository

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the App. Add Image Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the App. Add Image Repository page.
  2. App. Add Image Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Select repository typeSelect the image repository type.
    To use an image repository not registered in the Devops Console, select the Image Registry type.
    Choose whether to create a repositoryChoose whether to create a new repository or use an existing one.
    • If you selected the Docker hub or Image Registry type earlier, you can only select Use existing repository.
    Registered toolEnter repository information.
    Unregistered toolEnter repository information
    • You can register an image repository that is not registered with the DevOps Console tool.
    • Click the URL Check button to proceed with the verification process.
    • Only Use existing repository can be selected.
    Table. App. Add Image Repository Input Fields

Add pull-only image repository

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the Add Pull-Only Image Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the Add Pull-Only Image Repository page.
  2. Add Pull‑only Image Repository On the page, enter and configure each field.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.

Install Helm

To install Helm, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > HelmInstall menu in the left menu.
  3. In the K8S cluster field, select the K8S cluster you wish to install.
  4. Click the Helm chart you want to install to go to the Helm Chart Details screen.
  5. Click the Helm Install button. It navigates to the Helm Chart Install screen.
  6. Enter each item and click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Release nameEnter the name to use in the Helm chart release.
    It must be unique and cannot be duplicated within the namespace.
    CategoryDevelopment, Operations
    VersionSelect the version of the chart you want to install with Helm.
    K8S clusterDisplays the target K8S cluster for Helm install.
    Changes cannot be made, and if you wish to change, please select the K8S cluster from Start Helm Install.
    namespaceSelect the target namespace for the helm install from the list.
    Reference informationThis is reference information provided by the selected K8S cluster. Click each tab to view detailed information.
    Default Values.yaml included in the chartYou can edit the values.yaml file to run helm install with the desired values.
    If needed, refer to the reference information and edit the values.yaml file with those values.
    Writing typeForm type items are displayed only for Helm charts that support Form input
    • Form: Enter the items shown on the screen. For creating Helm charts that support Form input, see Creating Helm charts that support Form input.
    • values.yaml: Edit values in the yaml editor screen just like a regular Helm chart.
    Form / values.yaml input can be toggled, but switching clears any previously entered data.
    Form inputThis is the screen displayed when you select Form in the creation type; review each item and enter the values. After completing the entry, click the Validation Check button to verify the input values.
    Table. Helm Install Configuration Items
  7. Helm chart installation A popup window opens. Click the Run button to complete the Helm install.
  8. When the installation is complete, the Kubernetes deployment page opens.

Add Build Pipeline

To add a build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Build Pipeline menu. You will be taken to the Build Pipeline page.
  3. Build Pipeline page, click the Add Pipeline button at the top right. You will be taken to the Add Pipeline page.
  4. Add Pipeline Enter or configure each field on the page.
  5. Click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    CategorySelect Development or Operations
    Jenkins URLSelect Jenkins from the list to add a build pipeline.
    Build AgentSelect the agent (build environment) on which the build pipeline will run.
    Click the Info icon to view the list of tools provided by the agent.
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment where the build agent runs.
    Folder typeSelect the folder type.
    • Existing folder: Add a pipeline under an already created folder in Jenkins.
    • New folder: Create a new folder in Jenkins and add a pipeline under it.
    folderSelect a folder from the list or enter the name of a new folder to create.
    Pipeline namePlease enter the pipeline name.
    Parameter settingSet the parameters to be used in the pipeline.
    Environment variable configurationSet the environment variables to be used in the pipeline.
    Stage SettingsConfigure the stage to be used in the pipeline.
    Configure email recipients for build resultsSet the recipients who will receive the result email after the pipeline completes (success/failure).
    Table. Additional Build Pipeline Settings

Setting parameters

Follow these steps to set the parameters to use when running the pipeline.

  1. Click the Parameter area. The Parameter registration page opens on the right.
  2. When you click the Add button, the Add Parameter popup window opens.
  3. Add a parameter and click the Apply button to complete the parameter configuration.

Setting Environment Variables

Follow these steps to set environment variables for use in the pipeline.

  1. Click the Environment Variable area. The Environment Variable Registration page opens on the right.
  2. A list of pre-registered environment variables appears, and select the checkboxes for the environment variables you want to use.
  3. Check the selected environment variable and click the Apply button to complete the environment variable configuration.

Configure email recipients for build results

To set the recipients who will receive the build results by email, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Mail Recipient area. The Add Mail Recipient page opens on the right.
  2. In the Search area, search for the recipient and add them.
  3. Click the Apply button to complete the mail recipient settings.

Configure additional stage

Setting up the Checkout stage

To add a Checkout stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the New Stage area. The stage settings page opens on the right.
  2. Choose Checkout as the Stage type.
  3. Enter the information and click Apply. (In the URL, you can select the code repository you added from Add Code Repository (Option).)
    ItemExplanation
    URLSelect the code repository to perform the checkout.
    Branch nameEnter the name of the branch to checkout.
    Table. Checkout Stage Settings

Configure the Build stage

To add a Build stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  3. On the Stage Settings page, select Build as the Stage Type.
  4. After entering information on the Stage Settings page, click the Apply button.
    ItemExplanation
    languageSelect the programming language used by the application.
    Build toolSelect the Build tool used for building the application.
    Provides default Shell commands based on the selected Build tool.
    Shell commandEnter the command to use for building the application.
    All commands available in the Shell can be used.
    Table. Build stage input items

Setting Up Docker Build Stages

To add a Docker Build stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  3. Select Docker Build as the Stage Type.
  4. After entering the information, click the Apply button. (You can select the image repository you added in Registry URL from Add Image Repository (Option).)
item
Explanationexample
Registry URL (docker push)Select the image repository where the Docker build result image will be pushed.
IDThe ID value of the account to be used for the image repository
image tag patternThe Docker image tag is automatically generated according to the selected pattern.
  • {YYYYMMDD}: year, month, and day
  • {HHMMSS}: hour, minute, and second
  • {BUILD_NUM}: the number of the current build pipeline execution
  • {YYYYMMDD}.{HHMMSS}: 20200414.150938
  • {YYYYMMDD}.{BUILD_NUM}: 20220414.13
Add base image repositoryAdd Base Image Repository A popup window opens.
Registry URL (docker pull)Select the image repository for docker pull when the repository providing the Base Image used in the Dockerfile (FROM clause, docker pull) differs from the repository of the Registry URL (docker push).
Image build toolDisplays the image build tool.
Pre-build commandIf there are any commands that need to be run before building a Docker image, write them in shell command format.cp target/*.jar docker/
Image Build folderIf you need to run the Docker image build from a specific folder, select the checkbox and enter the folder path.docker
DockerfileEnter the Dockerfile filename.Dockerfile
Image build optionsEnter it if you need to use additional options with the image build tool.--no-cache
Build commandDisplays the image build command that will actually be executed.
Post-build commandIf there are commands that need to be executed after building a Docker image, write them in Shell command format.rm -rf docker/*.jar
Table. Docker Build Stage Input Items

Deploy to K8S Stage Configuration

Deploy to K8S To add a stage, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Add icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The stage settings page opens on the right.
  3. Select Deploy to K8S as the Stage type.
  4. After entering the information, click the Apply button. (Type Helm Release (Helm Chart type) can be selected to choose the Helm Release added in 헬름인스톨 하기.)
Item
Explanation
typeSelect deployment type
  • Helm release (Helm chart type)
  • Workload
  • ArgoCD
K8S clusterSelect a K8S cluster
  • Helm release (Helm chart type) When selected, a list of Helm releases deployed via the DevOps Console is displayed.
namespacePlease select a namespace.
Helm releaseSelect HelmRelease.
Deployment methodSelect deployment method
  • Recreate
  • Rolling Update
Registry URLSelect the image repository where the image to be deployed to Kubernetes has been docker pushed.
SecretSelect the secret information input method
  • Auto-generate: Automatically create the secret corresponding to the selected image repository from the Registry URL in the DevOps Console and use it.
  • Use existing secret: Use a pre-created secret through K8S secret management.
Table. Deploy to K8S stage input items

Check the final pipeline script

  1. Check the build pipeline script that will actually be generated. If needed, edit the script directly.
  2. Click the Complete button to finish adding the pipeline.

Pipeline addition result

Note
The added pipeline does not run automatically. If execution is required, run the pipeline manually.

2.2.2.2 - Add Build/Deploy (Workload Deployment)

The user can, through the following steps, create a new build pipeline in an already created DevOps Console project, build the source to create an image, and perform workload deployment on a Kubernetes cluster.

The workload added via Add Workload will be used in Deploy to K8S Stage Setup.

Build/Deploy Add Getting Started

To begin adding build/deployment, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.

Add code repository (Option)

Info
Proceed only if a new code repository is needed.

To add a code repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Code Repository page, click the Add Code Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the Add Code Repository page.
  2. On the Add Code Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • Registered tools: Users can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tools: You can enter the domain of a tool that is not registered. The unregistered tool entry appears only for App templates that do not include source code (Environment Only).
    New/Existing usageSelect Create new repository or Use existing repository
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication credentials.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • You must also go through the URL check process.
    Table. Code Repository Add Input Items

Add image repository (Option)

Information
Proceed only if a new image repository is needed.

To add an image repository, follow these steps.

App. Add image repository

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the App. Add Image Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the App. Add Image Repository page.
  2. App. Add Image Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Select repository typeSelect the image repository type.
    To use an image repository not registered in the Devops Console, select the Image Registry type.
    Choose whether to create a repositoryChoose whether to create a new repository or use an existing one.
    • If you selected the Docker hub or Image Registry type earlier, you can only select Use existing repository.
    Registered toolEnter repository information.
    Unregistered toolEnter repository information
    • You can register an image repository that is not registered with the DevOps Console tool.
    • Click the URL Check button to proceed with the verification process.
    • Only Use existing repository can be selected.
    Table. App. Add Image Repository Input Fields

Add pull-only image repository

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the Add Pull-Only Image Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the Add Pull-Only Image Repository page.
  2. Add Pull‑only Image Repository On the page, enter and configure each field.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.

Add workload

To add a workload, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. On the Kubernetes deployment page, click the Add workload menu. The Add workload popup opens.
  4. Add Workload Enter the information in the popup window and click the Save button.
  5. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete adding the workload.
    Item
    Explanation
    Query targetOnly workloads deployed with the same Base image as the App template used when the project was first created are displayed.
    Workload already registered in the projectShows the workload already registered in the project.
    • Workloads already registered in the project cannot be added.
    Table. Additional Workload Input Items

Modify K8S authentication information

K8S credentials are the authentication information used to verify permission to use a K8S cluster/namespace when performing a deployment in the build pipeline.

To modify the K8S credentials, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Edit Credentials icon to the right of K8S Cluster/Namespace. The Edit Credentials popup will open.
  2. Authentication information is fixed to the logged-in user’s account. Click the Save button to edit.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.
  4. K8S authentication information will be changed to the logged-in user.

Add Build Pipeline

To add a build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Build Pipeline menu. You will be taken to the Build Pipeline page.
  3. Build Pipeline page, click the Add Pipeline button at the top right. You will be taken to the Add Pipeline page.
  4. Add Pipeline Enter or configure each field on the page.
  5. Click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    CategorySelect Development or Operations
    Jenkins URLSelect Jenkins from the list to add a build pipeline.
    Build AgentSelect the agent (build environment) on which the build pipeline will run.
    Click the Info icon to view the list of tools provided by the agent.
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment where the build agent runs.
    Folder typeSelect the folder type.
    • Existing folder: Add a pipeline under an already created folder in Jenkins.
    • New folder: Create a new folder in Jenkins and add a pipeline under it.
    folderSelect a folder from the list or enter the name of a new folder to create.
    Pipeline namePlease enter the pipeline name.
    Parameter settingSet the parameters to be used in the pipeline.
    Environment variable configurationSet the environment variables to be used in the pipeline.
    Stage SettingsConfigure the stage to be used in the pipeline.
    Configure email recipients for build resultsSet the recipients who will receive the result email after the pipeline completes (success/failure).
    Table. Additional Build Pipeline Settings

Setting Parameters

Follow these steps to set the parameters used when running the pipeline.

  1. Click the Parameter card.
  2. Click the Add button to add a parameter.
  3. Click the Apply button to complete the parameter settings.

Setting Environment Variables

Follow these steps to set environment variables for use in the pipeline.

  1. Click the Environment Variable area. The Environment Variable Registration page opens on the right.
  2. A list of pre-registered environment variables appears, and select the checkboxes for the environment variables you want to use.
  3. Check the selected environment variable and click the Apply button to complete the environment variable configuration.

Configure email recipients for build results

To set the recipients who will receive the build results by email, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Mail Recipient area. The Add Mail Recipient page opens on the right.
  2. In the Search area, search for the recipient and add them.
  3. Click the Apply button to complete the mail recipient settings.

Add additional stage

Checkout stage setup

To add a Checkout stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  2. On the Stage Settings page, select Checkout as the Stage Type.
  3. After entering the information, click the Apply button. (You can select the code repository you added from 코드 저장소 추가하기 (Option) on the URL.)
    Itemdescription
    URLSelect the code repository to perform the checkout.
    Branch nameEnter the name of the branch to checkout.
    표. Checkout 스테이지 입력 항목

Setting up the Build stage

To add a Build stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  3. On the Stage Settings page, select Build as the Stage Type.
  4. After entering information on the Stage Settings page, click the Apply button.
    ItemExplanation
    languageSelect the programming language used by the application.
    Build toolSelect the Build tool used for building the application.
    Provides default Shell commands based on the selected Build tool.
    Shell commandEnter the command to use for building the application.
    All commands available in the Shell can be used.
    Table. Build stage input items

Docker Build Stage Setup

To add a Docker Build stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  3. Select Docker Build as the Stage Type.
  4. After entering the information, click the Apply button. (You can select the image repository you added in Registry URL from Add Image Repository (Option).)
item
Explanationexample
Registry URL (docker push)Select the image repository where the Docker build result image will be pushed.
IDThe ID value of the account to be used for the image repository
image tag patternThe Docker image tag is automatically generated according to the selected pattern.
  • {YYYYMMDD}: year, month, and day
  • {HHMMSS}: hour, minute, and second
  • {BUILD_NUM}: the number of the current build pipeline execution
  • {YYYYMMDD}.{HHMMSS}: 20200414.150938
  • {YYYYMMDD}.{BUILD_NUM}: 20220414.13
Add base image repositoryAdd Base Image Repository A popup window opens.
Registry URL (docker pull)Select the image repository for docker pull when the repository providing the Base Image used in the Dockerfile (FROM clause, docker pull) differs from the repository of the Registry URL (docker push).
Image build toolDisplays the image build tool.
Pre-build commandIf there are any commands that need to be run before building a Docker image, write them in shell command format.cp target/*.jar docker/
Image Build folderIf you need to run the Docker image build from a specific folder, select the checkbox and enter the folder path.docker
DockerfileEnter the Dockerfile filename.Dockerfile
Image build optionsEnter it if you need to use additional options with the image build tool.--no-cache
Build commandDisplays the image build command that will actually be executed.
Post-build commandIf there are commands that need to be executed after building a Docker image, write them in Shell command format.rm -rf docker/*.jar
Table. Docker Build Stage Input Items

Deploy to K8S Stage Setup

Deploy to K8S To add a stage, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the + icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  3. On the Stage Settings page, select Deploy to K8S as the Stage Type.
  4. On the Stage Settings page, after entering the information, click the Apply button. (If you select a workload in the type, you can select the workload added in 워크로드 추가하기.)
Item
Explanation
typeSelect deployment type
  • Helm release (Helm chart type)
  • Workload
  • ArgoCD
K8S clusterSelect a K8S cluster
  • Helm release (Helm chart type) When selected, a list of Helm releases deployed via the DevOps Console is displayed.
namespacePlease select a namespace.
Helm releaseSelect HelmRelease.
Deployment methodSelect deployment method
  • Recreate
  • Rolling Update
Registry URLSelect the image repository where the image to be deployed to Kubernetes has been docker pushed.
SecretSelect the secret information input method
  • Auto-generate: Automatically create the secret corresponding to the selected image repository from the Registry URL in the DevOps Console and use it.
  • Use existing secret: Use a pre-created secret through K8S secret management.
Table. Deploy to K8S stage input items

Check the final pipeline script

  1. Check the build pipeline script that will actually be generated. If needed, edit the script directly.
  2. Click the Complete button to finish adding the pipeline.

Pipeline addition result

Note
The added pipeline does not run automatically. If execution is required, run the pipeline manually.

2.2.2.3 - Add Build/Deploy (VM Deployment)

The user can, through the following steps, create a new build pipeline in an already created DevOps Console project, build the source to create an image, and proceed with (VM deployment) on the VM server.

The VM server group/VM server added via Add VM Server Group/VM Server (Option) will be used in Configure Deploy to VM Stage.

Build/Deploy Add Getting Started

To begin adding build/deployment, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card to go to the Project Dashboard page.

Add code repository (Option)

information
Proceed only if you need a new code repository.

To add a code repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Code Repository page, click the Add Code Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the Add Code Repository page.
  2. On the Add Code Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • Registered tools: Users can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tools: You can enter the domain of a tool that is not registered. The unregistered tool entry appears only for App templates that do not include source code (Environment Only).
    New/Existing usageSelect Create new repository or Use existing repository
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication credentials.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • You must also go through the URL check process.
    Table. Code Repository Add Input Items

Add image repository (Option)

information
Proceed only if a new image repository is needed.

To add an image repository, follow these steps.

App. Add image repository

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the App. Add Image Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the App. Add Image Repository page.
  2. App. Add Image Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Select repository typeSelect the image repository type.
    To use an image repository not registered in the Devops Console, select the Image Registry type.
    Choose whether to create a repositoryChoose whether to create a new repository or use an existing one.
    • If you selected the Docker hub or Image Registry type earlier, you can only select Use existing repository.
    Registered toolEnter repository information.
    Unregistered toolEnter repository information
    • You can register an image repository that is not registered with the DevOps Console tool.
    • Click the URL Check button to proceed with the verification process.
    • Only Use existing repository can be selected.
    Table. App. Add Image Repository Input Fields

Add pull-only image repository

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the Add Pull-Only Image Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the Add Pull-Only Image Repository page.
  2. Add Pull‑only Image Repository On the page, enter and configure each field.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.

Add artifact repository (Option)

information

Proceed only if a new artifact repository is needed.

When using a rollback artifact repository, Nexus can only use the raw(hosted) repository type.

To add an artifact repository, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add Artifact Repository button at the top right of the Artifact Repository page. You will be taken to the Add Artifact Repository page.
  2. On the Add Artifact Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Select whether to create a repositoryChoose whether to create a new repository or use an existing one.
    Enter basic informationBase URL, select repository type and enter repository/authentication information.
    Table. Input fields for adding an artifact repository

Add VM Server Group/VM Server (Option)

information
Proceed only if a new VM server group or VM server is required.

To add a VM server group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Management icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the Add button. It navigates to the Add VM Server Group page.
  4. Enter the basic information, then click the Save button to complete the VM server group configuration.
    ItemExplanation
    Server group nameEnter the VM server group name.
    ExplanationPlease enter a description.
    typeSelect the type of VM server group
    • SSH: Perform deployment using SSH commands when deploying a VM.
    • Agent: Perform deployment using an agent when deploying a VM. (Connect Agent)
    VM server
    • Add: Add the VM server that belongs to the VM server group.
    • Delete: Check the checkbox of the VM server you want to delete from the VM server group, then click Delete to remove it.
    Table. VM Server Group Add Input Items

Add VM server

To add a VM server, you need Manager permission for the corresponding VM server group.

Note
The Add VM Server popup opens differently depending on the type of VM server group.

To add a VM server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. Navigate to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. VM server group page, click the VM server group in the VM server group list where you want to add a VM server. You will be taken to the VM server group detail page.
  4. On the VM Server Group Details page, click the Add button. You will be taken to the Add VM Server page.
  5. Add VM Server page, after entering the basic information, click the Add button to complete the VM server configuration.
    ItemExplanation
    Server nameEnter the VM server name.
    ExplanationEnter the description.
    IPPlease enter the IP.
    SSH PortEnter the port of the VM server to use for SSH connections.
    OSPlease enter the OS.
    LocationPlease select a location.
    Authentication informationEnter the authentication information for the VM server to be used for SSH connections.
    Secret KeyThis is the secret key for authenticating the VM server where the agent is installed.
    Table. VM Server Additional Input Items

Add Build Pipeline

To add a build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Build Pipeline menu. You will be taken to the Build Pipeline page.
  3. Build Pipeline page, click the Add Pipeline button at the top right. You will be taken to the Add Pipeline page.
  4. Add Pipeline Enter or configure each field on the page.
  5. Click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    CategorySelect Development or Operations
    Jenkins URLSelect Jenkins from the list to add a build pipeline.
    Build AgentSelect the agent (build environment) on which the build pipeline will run.
    Click the Info icon to view the list of tools provided by the agent.
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment where the build agent runs.
    Folder typeSelect the folder type.
    • Existing folder: Add a pipeline under an already created folder in Jenkins.
    • New folder: Create a new folder in Jenkins and add a pipeline under it.
    folderSelect a folder from the list or enter the name of a new folder to create.
    Pipeline namePlease enter the pipeline name.
    Parameter settingSet the parameters to be used in the pipeline.
    Environment variable configurationSet the environment variables to be used in the pipeline.
    Stage SettingsConfigure the stage to be used in the pipeline.
    Configure email recipients for build resultsSet the recipients who will receive the result email after the pipeline completes (success/failure).
    Table. Additional Build Pipeline Settings

Setting Parameters

Follow these steps to set the parameters used when running the pipeline.

  1. Click the Parameter card.
  2. Click the Add button to add a parameter.
  3. Click the Apply button to complete the parameter settings.

Setting Environment Variables

Follow these steps to set environment variables for use in the pipeline.

  1. Click the Environment Variable area. The Environment Variable Registration page opens on the right.
  2. A list of pre-registered environment variables appears, and select the checkboxes for the environment variables you want to use.
  3. Check the selected environment variable and click the Apply button to complete the environment variable configuration.

Configure email recipients for build results

To set the recipients who will receive the build results by email, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Mail Recipient area. The Add Mail Recipient page opens on the right.
  2. In the Search area, search for the recipient and add them.
  3. Click the Apply button to complete the mail recipient settings.

Configure additional stage

Setting up the Checkout stage

To add a Checkout stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  2. On the Stage Settings page, select Checkout as the Stage Type.
  3. After entering the information, click the Apply button. (You can select the code repository you added from 코드 저장소 추가하기 (Option) on the URL.)
    Itemdescription
    URLSelect the code repository to perform the checkout.
    Branch nameEnter the name of the branch to checkout.
    표. Checkout 스테이지 입력 항목

Setting up the Build stage

To add a Build stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  3. On the Stage Settings page, select Build as the Stage Type.
  4. After entering information on the Stage Settings page, click the Apply button.
    ItemExplanation
    languageSelect the programming language used by the application.
    Build toolSelect the Build tool used for building the application.
    Provides default Shell commands based on the selected Build tool.
    Shell commandEnter the command to use for building the application.
    All commands available in the Shell can be used.
    Table. Build stage input items

Configuring Docker Build Stage

To add a Docker Build stage, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  3. Select Docker Build as the Stage Type.
  4. After entering the information, click the Apply button. (You can select the image repository you added in Registry URL from Add Image Repository (Option).)
item
Explanationexample
Registry URL (docker push)Select the image repository where the Docker build result image will be pushed.
IDThe ID value of the account to be used for the image repository
image tag patternThe Docker image tag is automatically generated according to the selected pattern.
  • {YYYYMMDD}: year, month, and day
  • {HHMMSS}: hour, minute, and second
  • {BUILD_NUM}: the number of the current build pipeline execution
  • {YYYYMMDD}.{HHMMSS}: 20200414.150938
  • {YYYYMMDD}.{BUILD_NUM}: 20220414.13
Add base image repositoryAdd Base Image Repository A popup window opens.
Registry URL (docker pull)Select the image repository for docker pull when the repository providing the Base Image used in the Dockerfile (FROM clause, docker pull) differs from the repository of the Registry URL (docker push).
Image build toolDisplays the image build tool.
Pre-build commandIf there are any commands that need to be run before building a Docker image, write them in shell command format.cp target/*.jar docker/
Image Build folderIf you need to run the Docker image build from a specific folder, select the checkbox and enter the folder path.docker
DockerfileEnter the Dockerfile filename.Dockerfile
Image build optionsEnter it if you need to use additional options with the image build tool.--no-cache
Build commandDisplays the image build command that will actually be executed.
Post-build commandIf there are commands that need to be executed after building a Docker image, write them in Shell command format.rm -rf docker/*.jar
Table. Docker Build Stage Input Items

Deploy to VM Stage Setup

To add a Deploy to VM stage, follow these steps.

  1. + Click the icon to add a new stage.
  2. Click the New Stage area. The Stage Settings page opens on the right.
  3. On the Stage Settings page, select Deploy to VM as the Stage Type.
  4. On the Stage Settings page, after entering the information, click the Apply button.
ItemExplanation
Deployment configurationSelect deployment configuration method
  • Set deployment target (SSH command/Agent): Deploy using SSH commands or an Agent.
  • Write script manually: The user enters all commands directly to deploy.
deployment groupSelect a deployment group
Release InformationThe contents stored in the deployment group are automatically configured.
Manual deploymentSelect the default value for manual deployment
  • Select the default setting for manual deployment parameters when running the pipeline.
Table. Deploy to VM stage input items

Check the final pipeline script

  1. Check the build pipeline script that will actually be generated. If needed, edit the script directly.
  2. Click the Complete button to finish adding the pipeline.

Pipeline addition result

Note
The added pipeline does not run automatically. If execution is required, run the pipeline manually.

2.2.2.4 - Check Deployment Target Namespace Permissions (Before Project Creation)

The user should create a DevOps Console project following the steps below, verify that they have permission for the target cluster / namespace before building and deploying the source, and, if necessary, request the responsible person to add permissions to the cluster / namespace.

DevOps Console K8S Cluster Namespace Permission Check

To verify permissions for a namespace of the K8S cluster used in the DevOps Console, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon in the top right. Tenant Dashboard page will open.
  2. In the left menu, click the Deployment Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster list page.
  3. Click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Click the Namespace tab. The Namespace List screen appears.
  5. Clicking the namespace takes you to the Namespace Details page.
Caution
You must have Administrator or User permissions. If you do not have permission, request access from the cluster administrator.
Reference
If the deployment target cluster is not registered, register the deployment target cluster manually. For detailed information, refer to the K8S Cluster.

2.3 - Project

2.3.1 - Project Overview

Users can view not only the detailed information of the project but also related Helm release information, the tools they are using, and other relevant details.

Users with a project role of Master or higher can edit the project name through this menu, and the Owner can delete the project.

Project Overview Getting Started

To start using the project overview, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Project Overview menu. The Project Overview screen appears.

Modify project name

To change the project name, follow these steps.

  1. Project Overview On the screen, click the Edit Project Name button at the top right. The Edit Project Name popup window will open.
  2. Edit Project Name In the popup window, edit the project name and click the Save button to complete the project name edit.

Delete Project

To delete a project, follow these steps.

  1. Project Overview On the screen, click the Delete Project button in the upper right. The Delete Project popup window opens.
  2. In the Project Deletion popup, click the Confirm button. You will be taken to the Project Deletion page.
  3. On the Project Deletion page, enter and select the required information, then click the Delete button. The Project Deletion popup window opens.
  4. Project Deletion Enter the project name in the popup window.
  5. Click the Confirm button to complete the project deletion.
    ItemExplanation
    Check project nameEnter the name of the current project you want to delete.
    Delete Helm release
    Delete build pipeline
    Delete code repository
    If you want to delete together with the project, select
    • Select: When the project is deleted, the actual physical deletion command is executed.
    • Deselect: It is only logically deleted in DevOps Console, and remains in each tool.
    Table. Project Deletion Input Items

Manage all projects

Note

Shows information for all projects that the user has permission for. Except for Project Name Change, Project Deletion, it provides the same functionality as Project Overview and Project Members.

For detailed information, refer to Project Overview and Project Members.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. Navigate to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Tenant > Project menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Project page.

2.3.2 - Create Project

2.3.2.1 - Create Project (Helm Chart Deployment)

Note

Users must be members of a project group and tenant to be able to create projects.

Refer to Create Project Group for how to join a project group and tenant.

Users can create a project that deploys an application to a specific Kubernetes cluster using App.Template, Helm Chart, and Tool Management.

Getting Started with Project Creation

To start creating a project, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Create Project button on the Main page. You will be taken to the Create Project page.

Enter basic information

Enter the basic information of the project. The project name and project ID must be unique and cannot be duplicated.

To enter the basic information, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Project Creation page, select the App. Template Utilization option of the Project Configuration Method item.
  2. For the deployment target field, select Kubernetes.
  3. After entering additional content, click the Start button.
    ItemExplanation
    Project namePlease enter the project name.
    Project IDPlease enter the project ID.
    Project configuration methodSelect a project configuration method
    • Use App template: select a pre‑provided App template.
    • Manual configuration: configure without an App template.
    deployment targetSelect deployment target
    • Kubernetes: Deploy the application to a Kubernetes cluster.
    • Kubernetes(ArgoCD): Deploy the application to a Kubernetes cluster using ArgoCD.
    • VM(Artifact): Deploy the application to a VM server.
    • VM(Docker): Package the application as a Docker image and deploy it to a VM server.
    • N/A: Choose this when you do not deploy the build output.
    K8S clusterSelect the target cluster for deployment
    • DevOps Console Only clusters that the user has access rights to can be selected among the K8S clusters.
    namespaceSelect the target namespace for deployment
    • Only namespaces that the user has access rights to, among the clusters retrieved from the K8S cluster, can be selected.
    Table. Project creation basic information entry items

App. Select Template

Note
For detailed information about the application template, see App.템플릿.

The user can select an application template to configure the project.

If you create a project based on an application template that includes sample source code, you can view the application that will be deployed.

In contrast, using a template labeled Environment Only configures only the build/deployment environment without sample source code.

If you configure a project using an already set up source code repository, select the template marked Environment Only.

To start selecting an application template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Application Template screen, enter the template name, select the application template card you want, and then click.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    FilterYou can easily find application templates using predefined filters.
    searchYou can easily find application templates through search.
    Table. Project Creation Application Template Items

Configure code repository

Users can configure a repository for managing source code through the code repository setup step.

Create new repository and use existing repository activation conditions differ depending on the application template and tool.

Repository typeApp with source code. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
App with source code included. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Source code not included (EnvironmentOnly)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
Source code not included (Environment Only)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Create new repositoryXX
Use existing repositoryXX
Table. Conditions for creating a new repository and enabling use of existing repository

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the code repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code repository item, select the Code repository type.
  2. Select Create new repository or Use existing repository, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the code repository to use
    • Registered tool: The user can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tool: You can enter the domain of an unregistered tool to use it. The unregistered tool entry appears only when the source code is not included (Environment Only) App. Template.
    New/Existing usagePlease select New repository creation or whether to use an existing repository.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication information
    • If you do not have an account, Don’t have an account? click the link to open the Account Creation Information popup where you can create an account.
    • After creating a new account, be sure to change your password via the Set Initial Password link.
    (Unregistered tool)
    Repository information
    Enter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • Click the URL Check button to undergo an additional verification process.
    Table. Project Creation Code Repository Settings

Configure Code Quality

Users can configure a repository for quality management.

To set code quality, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code Quality item, select Repository Type.
  2. Enter Basic Information and Authentication Information, then click the Connection Test button.
  3. Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • The types of Code Quality tools available to the user are displayed.
    New / Existing / Unused statusSelect repository creation method
    • If you select Create new repository, you must enter the quality project name/quality project key.
    • If you select Do not create, you can proceed directly to the next step.
    Base URLSelect the SonarQube URL.
    Quality Project NameEnter the name of the SonarQube project.
    Quality Project KeyEnter the Key of the SonarQube project.
    authentication informationEnter authentication credentials
    • You can create a new user or use existing authentication credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Code Quality Settings

Configure Image Repository

Users can configure a repository to store the built container images through the image repository configuration step.

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the image repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Image Repository item, select the Repository Type.
  2. Create new repository / Use existing repository select, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository type to use
    • The types of Image Registry tools available to the user are displayed.
    Repository informationSelect the repository creation method.
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed with the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter your credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Image Repository Settings

Configure the deployment target environment

Users can deploy by directly configuring via Helm charts.

Helm release name and Helm chart when selected, the Helm chart installation options and the default Values.yaml entries included in the chart are displayed.

Available Helm charts are associated with the App template. You can edit or delete them through Manage supported Helm charts.

To set the deployment target environment, follow these steps.

  1. In the Deployment target field, select Configure directly via Helm chart.
  2. Please enter the Helm release name.
  3. Click the Search button to select the Helm chart to use.
  4. After editing Values.yaml, click the Validation Check button.
  5. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    deployment targetPlease select the deployment target.
    Helm release nameEnter the name of the Helm release to create.
    • The name must be unique within the namespace of the target cluster.
    Helm chartSelect a Helm chart.
    • When a Helm chart is selected, detailed information about the chosen chart is displayed below
    K8S informationShows the information of the Kubernetes cluster required for configuring Value.yaml.
    Values. yamlEdit the contents of Values.yaml.
    • values.yaml file to be used when installing the Helm chart.
    Table. Project creation deployment target environment configuration items

Setting up the build pipeline

Users can configure pipelines that build and deploy applications.

You can view each stage of the pipeline to be configured and rename the build job.

To set up the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Build Pipeline screen branches based on IDP integration status.
    • For IDP-integrated Jenkins, click the User Check button to perform User Registration Confirmation.
    • For Jenkins not integrated with IDP, enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    Item
    Explanation
    Build/Deployment pipelineDisplays build/deployment pipeline information.
    • The build/deployment pipeline is displayed based on the information registered in the App template’s Manage Pipeline Templates.
    CategorySelect the development/operation distinction.
    • The permissions for the pipeline vary according to the development/operation distinction.
    URLSelect Jenkins to configure the pipeline, then enter the job name.
    • The Jenkins instances available to the user are displayed.
    Build AgentSelect the agent to be used for pipeline builds.
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment in which the build agent runs.
    User informationIDP Integrated Jenkins
    • Click the User Check button to verify user registration.
    • If you are not registered as a Jenkins user, when the User Registration Guide popup appears, click the Go to Jenkins link to proceed with User Sign‑Up or Initial Jenkins Login.
    IDP Non‑Integrated Jenkins
    • Enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
    Set environment variablesSet the environment variables to be registered in the Jenkins pipeline.
    Image Tag PatternSelect the tag assignment method for the container image.
    Deploy StrategySelect the deployment method for the container image.
    Recipient of deployment resultsSelect the user who will receive the results after the build pipeline completes.
    Table. Project creation build pipeline configuration items

Configure Custom Settings

The user can specify and modify the path of the Dockerfile file used for the build.

Additionally, you can view the final script generated based on the information configured in 빌드 파이프라인 설정하기 and also edit it.

Dockerfile, follow these steps to configure the pipeline script.

  1. After entering information on the Custom settings page, click the Connection Test button.
  2. Click the Next button when the Next button is enabled.
    ItemExplanation
    Dockerfile configurationCreate New Dockerfile or Use Existing Dockerfile. Please select.
    • «Use Existing Dockerfile is only selectable after choosing the Environment Only App template and, in 코드 저장소 설정하기, selecting Use Existing Repository.
    Dockerfile pathSpecify the Dockerfile file path in the source code.
    Branch nameThe branch name is automatically registered when you set it in Code Repository Configuration.
    DockerfileCheck and modify the contents of the Dockerfile.
    pipeline scriptCheck and modify the pipeline script.
    Table. Project Creation Custom Settings Items
Note
For detailed information about Jenkins pipeline scripts, see the official site.

Complete project creation

The user can review the project and tool information to be created and start project creation.

To complete project creation, follow the steps below.

  1. Summary Information After checking the information on the screen, click the Complete button.
  2. Project Creation popup window opens and the project creation proceeds.
  3. After the project creation is complete, click the Confirm button to go to the Project page.
Notice
It cannot be canceled during creation, and when the project is created successfully, the Confirm button becomes active.

2.3.2.2 - Create Project (Workload Deployment)

Reference
The user must be a member of a project group and tenant to be able to create a project.
Refer to Create Project Group for how to join a project group and tenant.

Users can create a project that deploys to a specific Kubernetes cluster using App.Template, Tool Management and workloads.

Getting Started with Project Creation

To begin creating a project, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Create Project button. You will be taken to the Create Project page.

Enter basic information

Enter the basic information of the project. The project name and project ID must be unique and cannot be duplicated.

To enter the basic information, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Project Creation page, select the App. Template Utilization option of the Project Configuration Method item.
  2. For the deployment target field, select Kubernetes.
  3. After entering additional content, click the Start button.
    ItemExplanation
    Project namePlease enter the project name.
    Project IDPlease enter the project ID.
    Project configuration methodSelect a project configuration method
    • Use App template: select a pre‑provided App template.
    • Manual configuration: configure without an App template.
    deployment targetSelect deployment target
    • Kubernetes: Deploy the application to a Kubernetes cluster.
    • Kubernetes(ArgoCD): Deploy the application to a Kubernetes cluster using ArgoCD.
    • VM(Artifact): Deploy the application to a VM server.
    • VM(Docker): Package the application as a Docker image and deploy it to a VM server.
    • N/A: Choose this when you do not deploy the build output.
    K8S clusterSelect the target cluster for deployment
    • DevOps Console Only clusters that the user has access rights to can be selected among the K8S clusters.
    namespaceSelect the target namespace for deployment
    • Only namespaces that the user has access rights to, among the clusters retrieved from the K8S cluster, can be selected.
    Table. Project creation basic information entry items

Select Application Template

Note
For detailed information about the application template, see App.템플릿.

The user can select an application template to configure the project.

If you create a project based on an application template that includes sample source code, you can view the application that will be deployed.

In contrast, using a template labeled Environment Only configures only the build/deployment environment without sample source code.

If you configure a project using an already set up source code repository, select the template marked Environment Only.

To start selecting an application template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Application Template screen, enter the template name, select the application template card you want, and then click.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    FilterYou can easily find application templates using predefined filters.
    searchYou can easily find application templates through search.
    Table. Project Creation Application Template Items

Configure code repository

Users can configure a repository for managing source code through the code repository setup step.

Create new repository and use existing repository activation conditions differ depending on the application template and tool.

Repository typeApp with source code. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
App with source code included. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Source code not included (EnvironmentOnly)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
Source code not included (Environment Only)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Create new repositoryXX
Use existing repositoryXX
Table. Conditions for creating a new repository and enabling use of existing repository

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the code repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code repository item, select the Code repository type.
  2. Select Create new repository or Use existing repository, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the code repository to use
    • Registered tool: The user can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tool: You can enter the domain of an unregistered tool to use it. The unregistered tool entry appears only when the source code is not included (Environment Only) App. Template.
    New/Existing usagePlease select New repository creation or whether to use an existing repository.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication information
    • If you do not have an account, Don’t have an account? click the link to open the Account Creation Information popup where you can create an account.
    • After creating a new account, be sure to change your password via the Set Initial Password link.
    (Unregistered tool)
    Repository information
    Enter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • Click the URL Check button to undergo an additional verification process.
    Table. Project Creation Code Repository Settings

Configure Code Quality

Users can configure a repository for quality management.

To set code quality, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code Quality item, select Repository Type.
  2. Enter Basic Information and Authentication Information, then click the Connection Test button.
  3. Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • The types of Code Quality tools available to the user are displayed.
    New / Existing / Unused statusSelect repository creation method
    • If you select Create new repository, you must enter the quality project name/quality project key.
    • If you select Do not create, you can proceed directly to the next step.
    Base URLSelect the SonarQube URL.
    Quality Project NameEnter the name of the SonarQube project.
    Quality Project KeyEnter the Key of the SonarQube project.
    authentication informationEnter authentication credentials
    • You can create a new user or use existing authentication credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Code Quality Settings

Configure Image Repository

Users can configure a repository to store the built container images through the image repository configuration step.

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the image repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Image Repository item, select the Repository Type.
  2. Create new repository / Use existing repository select, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository type to use
    • The types of Image Registry tools available to the user are displayed.
    Repository informationSelect the repository creation method.
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed with the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter your credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Image Repository Settings

Configure the deployment target environment

The user can deploy by selecting Select deployment target workload.

To configure the deployment target environment, follow the steps below.

  1. In the Deployment Target item, select Select Deployment Target Workload. The Deployment Target Workload area appears.
  2. In the Deployment Target Workload area, select the workload and container to be deployed.
  3. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    deployment targetSelect deployment target
    • Configure directly via Helm chart
    • Select workload for deployment target
    Query targetSelect the item to view.
    WorkloadSelect workload
    • Displays the workloads that exist in the selected Kubernetes cluster when starting project creation.
    target containerSelect the target container to use for the selected workload.
    Table. Deployment Target Environment Configuration Items

Setting up the build pipeline

Users can configure pipelines that build and deploy applications.

You can view each stage of the pipeline to be configured and rename the build job.

To set up the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Build Pipeline screen branches based on IDP integration status.
    • For IDP-integrated Jenkins, click the User Check button to perform User Registration Confirmation.
    • For Jenkins not integrated with IDP, enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    Item
    Explanation
    Build/Deployment pipelineDisplays build/deployment pipeline information.
    • The build/deployment pipeline is displayed based on the information registered in the App template’s Manage Pipeline Templates.
    CategorySelect the development/operation distinction.
    • The permissions for the pipeline vary according to the development/operation distinction.
    URLSelect Jenkins to configure the pipeline, then enter the job name.
    • The Jenkins instances available to the user are displayed.
    Build AgentSelect the agent to be used for pipeline builds.
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment in which the build agent runs.
    User informationIDP Integrated Jenkins
    • Click the User Check button to verify user registration.
    • If you are not registered as a Jenkins user, when the User Registration Guide popup appears, click the Go to Jenkins link to proceed with User Sign‑Up or Initial Jenkins Login.
    IDP Non‑Integrated Jenkins
    • Enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
    Set environment variablesSet the environment variables to be registered in the Jenkins pipeline.
    Image Tag PatternSelect the tag assignment method for the container image.
    Deploy StrategySelect the deployment method for the container image.
    Recipient of deployment resultsSelect the user who will receive the results after the build pipeline completes.
    Table. Project creation build pipeline configuration items

Configure Custom Settings

The user can specify and modify the path of the Dockerfile file used for the build.

Additionally, you can view the final script generated based on the information configured in 빌드 파이프라인 설정하기 and also edit it.

Dockerfile, follow these steps to configure the pipeline script.

  1. After entering information on the Custom settings page, click the Connection Test button.
  2. Click the Next button when the Next button is enabled.
    ItemExplanation
    Dockerfile configurationCreate New Dockerfile or Use Existing Dockerfile. Please select.
    • «Use Existing Dockerfile is only selectable after choosing the Environment Only App template and, in 코드 저장소 설정하기, selecting Use Existing Repository.
    Dockerfile pathSpecify the Dockerfile file path in the source code.
    Branch nameThe branch name is automatically registered when you set it in Code Repository Configuration.
    DockerfileCheck and modify the contents of the Dockerfile.
    pipeline scriptCheck and modify the pipeline script.
    Table. Project Creation Custom Settings Items
Note
For detailed information about Jenkins pipeline scripts, see the official site.

Complete project creation

The user can review the project and tool information to be created and start project creation.

To complete project creation, follow the steps below.

  1. Summary Information After checking the information on the screen, click the Complete button.
  2. Project Creation popup window opens and the project creation proceeds.
  3. After the project creation is complete, click the Confirm button to go to the Project page.
Notice
It cannot be canceled during creation, and when the project is created successfully, the Confirm button becomes active.

2.3.2.3 - Create Project (ArgoCD Deployment)

Note
  • Users must be members of a project group and tenant to be able to create projects.
  • Refer to Create Project Group for how to join a project group and tenant.
  • Deployment via ArgoCD requires that ArgoCD and the Git repository to be used for GitOps deployment be prepared in advance.
  • In the Devops Console, deployment is performed using the pre‑configured ArgoCD and its associated Git information.

Users can create a project that deploys using App.Template, Tool Management, and ArgoCD.

Getting Started with Project Creation

To start creating a project, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Create Project button. You will be taken to the Create Project page.

Enter basic information

Enter the project’s basic information. The project name and project ID must be unique and cannot be duplicated.

To enter the basic information, follow the steps below.

  1. Enter the project name and project ID.
  2. For the Project Configuration Method item, select App. Template Utilization.
  3. Please select deployment target as Kubernetes(ArgoCD).
  4. Please select the ArgoCD App creation method.
    • Create a new App: When creating a project, create a new ArgoCD application in ArgoCD.
    • Use existing App: Create a project using the existing ArgoCD application.
  5. After completing each input, click the Start button.

App. Select Template

Note
For detailed information about the application template, see App.템플릿.

The user can select an application template to configure the project.

If you create a project based on an application template that includes sample source code, you can view the application that will be deployed.

In contrast, using a template labeled Environment Only configures only the build/deployment environment without sample source code.

If you configure a project using an already set up source code repository, select the template marked Environment Only.

To start selecting an application template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Application Template screen, enter the template name, select the application template card you want, and then click.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    FilterYou can easily find application templates using predefined filters.
    searchYou can easily find application templates through search.
    Table. Project Creation Application Template Items

Configure code repository

Users can configure a repository for managing source code through the code repository setup step.

Create new repository and use existing repository activation conditions differ depending on the application template and tool.

Repository typeApp with source code. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
App with source code included. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Source code not included (EnvironmentOnly)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
Source code not included (Environment Only)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Create new repositoryXX
Use existing repositoryXX
Table. Conditions for creating a new repository and enabling use of existing repository

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the code repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code repository item, select the Code repository type.
  2. Select Create new repository or Use existing repository, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the code repository to use
    • Registered tool: The user can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tool: You can enter the domain of an unregistered tool to use it. The unregistered tool entry appears only when the source code is not included (Environment Only) App. Template.
    New/Existing usagePlease select New repository creation or whether to use an existing repository.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication information
    • If you do not have an account, Don’t have an account? click the link to open the Account Creation Information popup where you can create an account.
    • After creating a new account, be sure to change your password via the Set Initial Password link.
    (Unregistered tool)
    Repository information
    Enter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • Click the URL Check button to undergo an additional verification process.
    Table. Project Creation Code Repository Settings

Configure Code Quality

Users can configure a repository for quality management.

To set code quality, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code Quality item, select Repository Type.
  2. Enter Basic Information and Authentication Information, then click the Connection Test button.
  3. Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • The types of Code Quality tools available to the user are displayed.
    New / Existing / Unused statusSelect repository creation method
    • If you select Create new repository, you must enter the quality project name/quality project key.
    • If you select Do not create, you can proceed directly to the next step.
    Base URLSelect the SonarQube URL.
    Quality Project NameEnter the name of the SonarQube project.
    Quality Project KeyEnter the Key of the SonarQube project.
    authentication informationEnter authentication credentials
    • You can create a new user or use existing authentication credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Code Quality Settings

Configure Image Repository

Users can configure a repository to store the built container images through the image repository configuration step.

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the image repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Image Repository item, select the Repository Type.
  2. Create new repository / Use existing repository select, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository type to use
    • The types of Image Registry tools available to the user are displayed.
    Repository informationSelect the repository creation method.
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed with the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter your credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Image Repository Settings

Configure the deployment target environment

Note

To set the deployment target environment, ArgoCD and the Git repository to be used for GitOps deployment must be prepared.
ArgoCD App creation method The input values vary depending on the selection.

  • Create new App
  • Use existing App

Create new App

To create a new ArgoCD application and set the target deployment environment, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Deployment target environment screen, enter the ArgoCD URL and click the Confirm button.
  2. The authentication information entry screen appears.
  3. Enter Authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. The input screen for the new ArgoCD application appears.
  5. Enter ArgoCD application name and ArgoCD project name.
  6. Select the Repository type.
  7. Please select Helm chart.
  8. Information about Helm chart and Helm chart Git repository is displayed.
  9. After editing Values.yaml, click the Validation Check button.
  10. After entering the Git repository information and authentication details, click the Connection Test button.
  11. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    URL input methodSelect the URL input method.
    • Select from the list: the ArgoCD tools registered as tools will appear.
    • Enter manually
    ArgoCD URLAfter entering the ArgoCD URL, click the Confirm button. The Authentication Information area appears.
    Authentication informationEnter Authentication Information and click the Connection Test button. The Application Basic Information area opens.
    Application nameEnter the name of the ArgoCD application to create in ArgoCD.
    Project nameEnter the project name of the ArgoCD application.
    Repository typeSelect the repository type.
    • Create a new repository with Helm chart: Use a Helm chart to create a Git repository for GitOps. Helm chart information area opens.
    • Use existing Git repository
    Helm chartPlease select a Helm chart.
    Helm chart Git repositoryEnter the information for the Git repository to be used by GitOps.
    Table. New App Creation Settings

Use existing App

To configure the target deployment environment using an existing ArgoCD application, follow these steps.

  1. Target deployment environment screen, enter ArgoCD URL, then click the Confirm button.
  2. The screen for entering the existing ArgoCD application name and credentials appears.
  3. Enter the Existing Application Name and Authentication Information, then click the Connection Test button.
  4. A URL Check popup window opens to distinguish the Git repository linked to the ArgoCD application..
  5. URL Check After editing the Base URL in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
  6. The Git repository information associated with the ArgoCD application is displayed.
  7. Enter the authentication information for the Git repository, then click the Connection Test button.
  8. Enter the yaml file name and key value to change in the Manifest Root path area.
  9. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    URL input methodSelect URL input method
    • Select from list: ArgoCD tools registered as tools appear.
    • Enter manually
    ArgoCD URLAfter entering the ArgoCD URL, click the Confirm button. The Existing application name and credentials section will appear.
    Application name / authentication informationEnter the Existing application name and credentials, then click the Connection Test button. The Git repository and ArgoCD information area appears.
    URL CheckSeparate the Base URL and Path in the full URL.
    Git repository credentialsEnter the credentials for the Git repository used by the selected existing application.
    Image Repo KeyEnter the path to the Yaml file that records the image repository information and the Key value. If the key values for repository and tag are the same, enter the same value.
    Image Tag KeyEnter the path to the Yaml file containing the image tag information and the Key value. If the repository and tag have the same key, enter the same value.
    Image Secret KeyEnter the path to the Yaml file containing the image secret information and the Key value.
    Deploy Strategy KeyEnter the path to the Yaml file containing deployment strategy information and the Key value (optional).
    Table. Existing App usage configuration items
Reference
The ArgoCD deployment project in the DevOps Console performs deployments by modifying the information registered in the Image Repo Key, Image Tag Key, Image Secret Key, and Deploy Strategy Key.

Setting up the build pipeline

Users can configure pipelines that build and deploy applications.

You can view each stage of the pipeline to be configured and rename the build job.

To set up the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Build Pipeline screen branches based on IDP integration status.
    • For IDP-integrated Jenkins, click the User Check button to perform User Registration Confirmation.
    • For Jenkins not integrated with IDP, enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    Item
    Explanation
    Build/Deployment pipelineDisplays build/deployment pipeline information.
    • The build/deployment pipeline is displayed based on the information registered in the App template’s Manage Pipeline Templates.
    CategorySelect the development/operation distinction.
    • The permissions for the pipeline vary according to the development/operation distinction.
    URLSelect Jenkins to configure the pipeline, then enter the job name.
    • The Jenkins instances available to the user are displayed.
    Build AgentSelect the agent to be used for pipeline builds.
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment in which the build agent runs.
    User informationIDP Integrated Jenkins
    • Click the User Check button to verify user registration.
    • If you are not registered as a Jenkins user, when the User Registration Guide popup appears, click the Go to Jenkins link to proceed with User Sign‑Up or Initial Jenkins Login.
    IDP Non‑Integrated Jenkins
    • Enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
    Set environment variablesSet the environment variables to be registered in the Jenkins pipeline.
    Image Tag PatternSelect the tag assignment method for the container image.
    Deploy StrategySelect the deployment method for the container image.
    Recipient of deployment resultsSelect the user who will receive the results after the build pipeline completes.
    Table. Project creation build pipeline configuration items

Configure Custom Settings

The user can specify and modify the path of the Dockerfile file used for the build.

Additionally, you can view the final script generated based on the information configured in 빌드 파이프라인 설정하기 and also edit it.

Dockerfile, follow these steps to configure the pipeline script.

  1. After entering information on the Custom settings page, click the Connection Test button.
  2. Click the Next button when the Next button is enabled.
    ItemExplanation
    Dockerfile configurationCreate New Dockerfile or Use Existing Dockerfile. Please select.
    • «Use Existing Dockerfile is only selectable after choosing the Environment Only App template and, in 코드 저장소 설정하기, selecting Use Existing Repository.
    Dockerfile pathSpecify the Dockerfile file path in the source code.
    Branch nameThe branch name is automatically registered when you set it in Code Repository Configuration.
    DockerfileCheck and modify the contents of the Dockerfile.
    pipeline scriptCheck and modify the pipeline script.
    Table. Project Creation Custom Settings Items
Note
For detailed information about Jenkins pipeline scripts, see the official site.

Complete project creation

The user can review the project and tool information to be created and start project creation.

To complete project creation, follow the steps below.

  1. Summary Information After checking the information on the screen, click the Complete button.
  2. Project Creation popup window opens and the project creation proceeds.
  3. After the project creation is complete, click the Confirm button to go to the Project page.
Notice
It cannot be canceled during creation, and when the project is created successfully, the Confirm button becomes active.

2.3.2.4 - Create Project (VM Deployment)

Note

Users must be members of a project group and tenant to be able to create projects.

Refer to Create Project Group for how to join a project group and tenant.

Users can create a project that deploys to a specific VM server using App.Template and Tool Management.

Before creating a project for VM deployment, register information about the target VM server. For detailed information on VM server registration, refer to Getting Started with VM Server Group.

Getting Started with Project Creation

To start creating a project, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Create Project button. It navigates to the Create Project page.

Enter basic information

  1. On the Create Project page, enter the project name and project ID.
  2. For the Project Configuration Method item, select App. Template Utilization.
  3. Select VM(Artifact) or VM(Docker) for the Deployment Target field.
    • VM(Artifact) creates a war/jar file and transfers it to the deployment target server.
    • VM(Docker) runs the docker command after the build and image creation.
  4. Please select the deployment method.
  5. After each input is completed, click the Start button.

App. Select Template

Note
For detailed information about the application template, see App.템플릿.

The user can select an application template to configure the project.

If you create a project based on an application template that includes sample source code, you can view the application that will be deployed.

In contrast, using a template labeled Environment Only configures only the build/deployment environment without sample source code.

If you configure a project using an already set up source code repository, select the template marked Environment Only.

To start selecting an application template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Application Template screen, enter the template name, select the application template card you want, and then click.
  2. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    FilterYou can easily find application templates using predefined filters.
    searchYou can easily find application templates through search.
    Table. Project Creation Application Template Items

Configure code repository

Users can configure a repository for managing source code through the code repository setup step.

Create new repository and use existing repository activation conditions differ depending on the application template and tool.

Repository typeApp with source code. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
App with source code included. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Source code not included (EnvironmentOnly)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console registration tool
Source code not included (Environment Only)
App. Template
+
DevOps Console unregistered tool
Create new repositoryXX
Use existing repositoryXX
Table. Conditions for creating a new repository and enabling use of existing repository

Note
Once authentication information is saved, you can perform a Connection Test without entering account information by using Use Saved Authentication Information thereafter.

To modify or delete stored credentials, refer to Manage Authentication Information.

To set up the code repository, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code repository item, select the Code repository type.
  2. Select Create new repository or Use existing repository, then enter the information.
  3. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  4. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the code repository to use
    • Registered tool: The user can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tool: You can enter the domain of an unregistered tool to use it. The unregistered tool entry appears only when the source code is not included (Environment Only) App. Template.
    New/Existing usagePlease select New repository creation or whether to use an existing repository.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication information
    • If you do not have an account, Don’t have an account? click the link to open the Account Creation Information popup where you can create an account.
    • After creating a new account, be sure to change your password via the Set Initial Password link.
    (Unregistered tool)
    Repository information
    Enter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • Click the URL Check button to undergo an additional verification process.
    Table. Project Creation Code Repository Settings

Configure Code Quality

Users can configure a repository for quality management.

To set code quality, follow these steps.

  1. In the Code Quality item, select Repository Type.
  2. Enter Basic Information and Authentication Information, then click the Connection Test button.
  3. Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • The types of Code Quality tools available to the user are displayed.
    New / Existing / Unused statusSelect repository creation method
    • If you select Create new repository, you must enter the quality project name/quality project key.
    • If you select Do not create, you can proceed directly to the next step.
    Base URLSelect the SonarQube URL.
    Quality Project NameEnter the name of the SonarQube project.
    Quality Project KeyEnter the Key of the SonarQube project.
    authentication informationEnter authentication credentials
    • You can create a new user or use existing authentication credentials.
    Table. Project Creation Code Quality Settings

Configure Artifact Repository

Users can configure a repository for artifacts.

If you select Uncreated, you can proceed directly to the next step.

To configure the artifact repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Artifact Repository screen, select the repository type.
  2. Enter the basic information and authentication information, then click the Connection Test button.
  3. When the Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository type to use
    • The types of Artifact Repository tools available to the user are displayed.
    New / Existing / Unused statusSelect the repository creation method
    • If you select Uncreated, you can proceed directly to the next step.
    Base URL / Endpoint URLSelect a Nexus URL or an Object Storage URL.
    Storage type / bucket name
    • In the case of Nexus, it is automatically registered as raw(hosted).
    • In the case of Object Storage, the bucket name entered during tool registration is automatically registered.
    Repository name / Folder name
    • Enter the repository name to use in Nexus.
    • Enter the folder name to use in Object Storage.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication information
    • You can create a new user or use existing authentication information.
    Table. Artifact Repository Configuration Input Items

Configure the deployment target environment

Reference

Deployment target configuration requires that VM server group/VM server be registered.

For registration methods and detailed information, refer to VM서버 그룹.

To set the deployment target environment, follow these steps.

  1. Deployment Target Environment on the screen, after entering the required information, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Deployment configurationChoose whether to write a deployment script manually
    • When selecting to write a deployment script manually, write the content in the custom step.
    Deployment methodThe selected deployment method is displayed.
    Artifact repositoryThe address of the repository to use when the agent mode is selected is displayed.
    • Deployment mode is enabled when it is Agent.
    Manual deploymentSelect the default value for manual deployment
    • Select the default setting for parameters related to manual deployment when running the pipeline.
    Deployment orderIf there are multiple target servers, choose whether to deploy in parallel or sequentially.
    Deployment target settingsSet the deployment target server.
    • When you click Settings, the Deploy Target VM Settings popup opens.
    Automatic recovery settingSelect whether to enable automatic rollback
    • If the deployment fails, it will be rolled back to the most recent successful deployment.
    • Deployment method is enabled when it is Agent.
    Command before file deploymentWrite the commands that need to be executed before file deployment.
    File to send
    • Source: Enter the file path after the build pipeline execution path (Jenkins workspace).
    • Target: Enter the path where the file will be deployed on the VM server.
    • Add button can be used to add files.
    Command after file distributionWrite the commands that must be executed after file deployment.
    Table. Deployment Target Environment Configuration Items

Setting up the build pipeline

Users can configure pipelines that build and deploy applications.

You can review each stage of the pipeline to be configured and rename the build job.

To set up the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. In the build pipeline configuration step, enter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  2. Next button is enabled, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Build/Deployment pipelineDisplays build/deployment pipeline information.
    • The build/deployment pipeline is displayed based on the information registered in the App. template’s Manage Pipeline Templates
    CategorySelect Development/Operation mode
    URLSelect Jenkins to configure the pipeline, then enter the Job name
    • Jenkins available to the user appears.
    Build AgentSelect the agent to be used for pipeline builds
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment in which the build agent runs.
    Authentication informationEnter the credentials for Jenkins.
    Set environment variablesJenkins Set the environment variables to be registered in the pipeline.
    Deployment result recipientSelect the user who will receive the results after the build pipeline completes.
    Table. Build pipeline configuration input items

Configure Custom Settings

In the deployment target server and deployment settings step, if you select the deployment configuration item write deployment script directly, complete the deployment configuration by modifying the pipeline contents at this stage.

To customize the settings, follow these steps.

  1. After reviewing and editing the content in the Custom step, click the Next button.

Complete project creation

The user can review the project and tool information to be created and start project creation.

To complete project creation, follow the steps below.

  1. Summary Information After checking the information on the screen, click the Complete button.
  2. Project Creation popup window opens and the project creation proceeds.
  3. After the project creation is complete, click the Confirm button to go to the Project page.
Notice
It cannot be canceled during creation, and when the project is created successfully, the Confirm button becomes active.

2.3.2.5 - Create Project (Empty)

Reference
  • Users must be members of a project group and tenant to be able to create projects.
  • For instructions on joining a project group and tenant, refer to Create Project Group.

The user can create an Empty (Empty) project without any configuration.

To create an empty project and configure build/deployment, the user must manually perform tasks such as Add code repository, Add image repository, Install Helm, Add build pipeline.

Getting Started with Project Creation

To start creating an empty project, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Create Project button. You will be taken to the Create Project page.

Enter basic information

Enter the basic information for the project. The project name and project ID must be unique and cannot be duplicated.

To enter the basic information, follow these steps.

  1. On the Project Creation page, select Direct Configuration under the Project Configuration Method item.
  2. Enter Project Name and Project ID, then click the Start button. The Summary Information screen appears.

Complete project creation

The user can review the project and tool information to be created and start project creation.

To complete project creation, follow the steps below.

  1. Summary Information After checking the information on the screen, click the Complete button.
  2. Project Creation popup window opens and the project creation proceeds.
  3. After the project creation is complete, click the Confirm button to go to the Project page.
Notice
It cannot be canceled during creation, and when the project is created successfully, the Confirm button becomes active.

2.3.3 - Start Project

The user can create a project via Create a project.

On the project page, users can utilize various menus for project management.

Getting Started

To start the project, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.

Project menu

Dashboard

Dashboard (Project Dashboard)

This is a dashboard menu that lets you view information about the individual items that make up the project at a glance.

Build/Deployment

Build pipeline(Build/Deploy - Build Pipeline)

This menu allows you to view the Jenkins pipeline and perform and modify build/deployment tasks.

Kubernetes deployment (Build/Deploy - Kubernetes Deployment)

This menu lets you view the list of deployed Helm releases and their deployment status.

VM deployment (Build/Deploy - VM Deployment)

This menu allows you to view the list of deployed VMs and their deployment status.

Helm install (Helm install)

This is the menu where you can view Helm charts.

Ingress/Service management (Ingress/Service management)

A menu where you can view and add Ingress/Service.

Kubernetes Secret management (Kubernetes Secret management)

This menu allows you to view and add Kubernetes Secrets.

Environment Variable Management (환경변수 관리)

This is a menu that allows you to view and add environment variables.

storage

Code repository (repository)

This is a menu that allows you to view and add code repositories for a project.

Artifact Repository (Artifact Repository)

This menu lets you view and add the project’s image repository.

Image Repository (Image Repository)

This menu allows you to view and add the project’s image repository.

Chart repository (Chart repository)

This menu lets you view and add a project’s chart repositories.

Helm chart (헬름차트)

A menu for viewing and adding project Helm charts.

Quality

Code Quality (Code Quality)

Project code quality. This is a menu that allows you to view and add projects.

Project Overview

Project Overview (프로젝트 개요)

This menu allows you to view not only the project’s detailed information but also related Helm release information and details about the tools you are using.

member

Member (Project Member)

This is a menu for managing project users.

2.3.4 - Project Dashboard

You can view the information of individual items that make up the project at a glance on the dashboard.

Getting Started with Project Dashboard

To start using the dashboard, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Dashboard menu in the left menu.
    ItemExplanation
    Project informationDisplays the basic project information.
    pipelineDisplays the status of pipelines added to the build pipeline.
    Click the numeric link to view the status of other pipelines.
    Helm release statusYou can check the status of the Helm release added to the Kubernetes deployment.
    Blue/Green deployment statusYou can check the status of blue/green deployments.
    Canary statusYou can check the canary status.
    ArgoCD application statusYou can check the status of the ArgoCD application added to the Kubernetes deployment.
    Kubernetes deployment historyDisplays the Kubernetes deployment history in reverse chronological order.
    VM deployment historyDisplays the VM deployment history in reverse chronological order.
    code qualityDisplays code quality tool analysis information by integrating with the code quality tool.
    Code historyDisplays the history of the added code repository.
    For the following items, you can select from the list to display in the code history.
    • Git configuration
    • Git Branch
    Scale and Usage StatusDisplays the project’s users, tools, and build/deployment status.
    Monthly pipeline execution trendShows the monthly pipeline execution count, average execution interval, and execution time for the project.
    Inactive pipelineShows a list of pipelines that have not been run and have no successful history, according to the reference date.
    Required stageShows which stage tasks were performed in the pipeline, based on the code repository.
    Recent event historyYou can view the recent event history that occurred in the project.
    Table. Project Dashboard Display Items

2.3.5 - Project Members

Reference
Users with Master or higher can manage the permissions of project users.

It includes features to grant other users access to the project, modify the permissions of users who already have access, or delete permissions so they can no longer access the project.

Getting Started with Project Members

To start using project members, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Member menu in the left menu. The Member screen appears.

Add Project Member

To add members to a project, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add button in the Member list. Member Add popup opens.
  2. After completing the settings in the Add Member popup, click the Confirm button to finish adding a project member.
    ItemExplanation
    User tabAfter searching for the email, click the Add button to add as a member.
    Project tabSelect to add all members from another project to the current project’s members.
    Add memberClick the user you want to add as a project member to add them.
    Permission SettingsSet the role to assign to members.
    • Owner
    • Master
    • Developer
    • Viewer
    Delete memberClick the X icon to delete from the project members.
    Table. Project Member Add Screen Items
Reference
Please refer to the Project Roles and Permissions for project role permissions.

Change Project Member Role

To change a project member’s role, follow these steps.

  1. Identify the user whose role you want to change in the Member list.
  2. Select the user’s project role from the list. It is saved immediately upon selection, and the user’s project role will be updated.

Delete project member

To remove a member from a project, follow these steps.

  1. In the Member list, select the checkbox of the user you wish to delete.
  2. Click the Delete button above the Member list to remove the selected user from the project members.

2.4 - Build/Deploy

2.4.1 - Build Pipeline

Reference
For detailed information about the Jenkins pipeline, refer to the official site.

Users can group consecutive tasks into a single pipeline. The pipeline configured here is created as a Jenkins pipeline.

Starting the Build Pipeline

To start using the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Build Pipeline menu. You will be taken to the Build Pipeline page.

Add Build Pipeline

To add a build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Build Pipeline menu. You will be taken to the Build Pipeline page.
  3. Build Pipeline page, click the Add Pipeline button at the top right. You will be taken to the Add Pipeline page.
  4. Add Pipeline Enter or configure each field on the page.
  5. Click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    CategorySelect Development or Operations
    Jenkins URLSelect Jenkins from the list to add a build pipeline.
    Build AgentSelect the agent (build environment) on which the build pipeline will run.
    Click the Info icon to view the list of tools provided by the agent.
    Build environment OSDisplays the OS information of the environment where the build agent runs.
    Folder typeSelect the folder type.
    • Existing folder: Add a pipeline under an already created folder in Jenkins.
    • New folder: Create a new folder in Jenkins and add a pipeline under it.
    folderSelect a folder from the list or enter the name of a new folder to create.
    Pipeline namePlease enter the pipeline name.
    Parameter settingSet the parameters to be used in the pipeline.
    Environment variable configurationSet the environment variables to be used in the pipeline.
    Stage SettingsConfigure the stage to be used in the pipeline.
    Configure email recipients for build resultsSet the recipients who will receive the result email after the pipeline completes (success/failure).
    Table. Additional Build Pipeline Settings

Setting Parameters

Follow these steps to set the parameters used when running the pipeline.

  1. Click the Parameter card.
  2. Click the Add button to add a parameter.
  3. Click the Apply button to complete the parameter settings.

Setting Environment Variables

Follow these steps to set environment variables for use in the pipeline.

  1. Click the Environment Variable area. The Environment Variable Registration page opens on the right.
  2. A list of pre-registered environment variables appears, and select the checkboxes for the environment variables you want to use.
  3. Check the selected environment variable and click the Apply button to complete the environment variable configuration.

Setting up the stage

To set up the stages to be used in the pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Click the New Stage card. The Stage area appears on the right.
  2. In the Stage area, select the tool and Stage type.
  3. Enter the required information according to the stage type and click the Apply button to complete the stage configuration.
Reference
Click the Add icon to add a stage.
For detailed information about stage configuration, see Stage.

Configure email recipients for build results

To set the recipients who will receive the build results by email, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Mail Recipient area. The Add Mail Recipient page opens on the right.
  2. In the Search area, search for the recipient and add them.
  3. Click the Apply button to complete the mail recipient settings.

Check the final pipeline script

  1. Check the build pipeline script that will actually be generated. If needed, edit the script directly.
  2. Click the Complete button to finish adding the pipeline.

Pipeline addition result

  1. The added result appears on the Build Pipeline page.
Note
The added pipeline does not run automatically. If execution is required, run the pipeline manually.

Managing Build Pipelines

Build pipeline list

ItemExplanation
statusDisplays the build pipeline status.
  • Green: Completed successfully
  • Blue (blinking): Running
  • Red: Failed
  • Gray: Others
URLGo to the Build Pipeline page of Jenkins.
Recent build execution history URLNavigate to the Build Execution History page of Jenkins.
logpipeline log The popup window opens.
RunRun the build pipeline.
View moreDisplays additional menu.
  • Edit pipeline
  • Duplicate pipeline
  • Delete pipeline
  • Build history
View pipeline stageWhen you click the Expand icon, the stage view expands.
Table. Build pipeline list view feature

Build Pipeline Credentials

When performing build pipeline actions (run, stop, edit, delete, etc.), user credentials are required, so you may request them from the user as needed.

When integrating IDP with Jenkins

If you are not registered as a Jenkins user, when the User Registration Guide popup appears, click the Go to Jenkins link to sign up or perform your first Jenkins login.

For Jenkins without IDP integration

Jenkins credentials are not stored; when the Add Account popup appears, select Use Existing User or Create New User in Account Type to add credentials.

Run Build Pipeline

To run the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Build pipeline page, click the Run button of the build pipeline you want to execute.
  2. If there are parameters, the Pipeline Execution Parameter Input popup window opens.
  3. After entering the required fields, click the Confirm button.
Caution

If the Number of executors setting for the Built-In Node in Jenkins system configuration is set to 1 or higher, a security issue may arise, preventing the pipeline from running.

  • In this case, you need to contact the Jenkins administrator to change the settings.
    • In the Jenkins administration menu, you can enable it by changing the Number of executors item of the Built-In Node to 0.
  • Note Jenkins officially recommends avoiding running builds on the Controller Node.

View build pipeline execution logs

Follow these steps to view the build pipeline execution logs.

  1. On the Build Pipeline page, click the Log button of the build pipeline you want to run.
  2. pipeline log A popup window opens, allowing you to view the execution log.
Reference
If a build pipeline is running, the Pipeline Log popup window refreshes periodically to display the latest logs.

Build pipeline build history view

To view the complete build history of the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Build pipeline page, click the More icon of the build pipeline you want to view.
  2. Click the Build History menu. The Build History page opens.
    ItemExplanation
    Config DiffConfig Diff The popup window opens.
    logPipeline Log The popup window opens.
    Additional menuNavigate to the Build Details page.
    View pipeline stageClick the Expand icon to expand the stage view.
    Table. Build Pipeline List View Feature

Compare configuration information

You can compare the configuration information with previous build history using the Config Diff button.

Log View

Through the Log button, you can view the logs of the build history.

Build Details

You can view detailed build information via the More icon.

Modify Build Pipeline

To modify the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Build pipeline page, click the More icon of the build pipeline you want to edit.
  2. Click the Edit Pipeline button. You will be taken to the Edit Pipeline page.

Edit the script directly

To edit the pipeline script directly, follow these steps.

  1. In the script editor window of the Pipeline Edit page, directly enter a script that conforms to the syntax supported by Jenkins.
  2. After completing the input, click the Save button to finish editing the pipeline.

Modify using the Script Generator feature

Reference
In the Script Generator feature, only one stage can be set. If you want to edit multiple stages, perform it multiple times.

Follow these steps to modify the pipeline script using the Script Generator feature.

  1. On the Pipeline Edit page, change Script Generator to ON.
  2. Select the build agent and script type.
  3. After completing Stage Setup, click the Create Script button to generate the script.
  4. Refer to the generated script to modify the pipeline, and click the Save button to complete the pipeline modification.
    ItemExplanation
    Script GeneratorTurn the Script Generator feature ON/OFF.
    Script Basic InformationSelect the basic information for script generation.
    Existing scriptThis is an existing script.
    New scriptThis is a new script generated by the Script Generator.
    Script modificationRefer to the newly created script and directly edit the existing script on the left.
    Update Jenkins CredentialIf the newly created script contains new credentials, click the Jenkins Credential Update button. This updates (saves) the credentials in Jenkins.
    K8S Secret updateDeploy to K8S stage: when changing the K8S Secret, click the K8S Secret Update button. Update (save) it for use during Secret creation and deployment.
    Table. Script Generator feature

Clone Build Pipeline

To duplicate the build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Click the More icon of the build pipeline you want to clone.
  2. Click the Clone Pipeline menu. The Clone Pipeline popup window opens.
  3. After completing the information entry, click the Save button to finish replicating the pipeline.
    ItemExplanation
    Pipeline replication informationEnter the information for the pipeline to be cloned.
    Pipeline modificationModify the pipeline to be cloned.
    Table. Build Pipeline Replication Feature

Delete Build Pipeline

To delete a build pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Build pipeline page, click the More icon of the build pipeline you want to delete.
  2. Click the Delete Pipeline menu. The Delete Pipeline popup window opens.
  3. Delete Pipeline In the popup window, click the Confirm button to complete the pipeline deletion.
Note

Also delete the pipeline in Jenkins

  • Selection: The pipeline is actually deleted from Jenkins.
  • Unselected: Build pipeline is deleted only from the list and remains in Jenkins.

2.4.1.1 - Stage

The user can view the description of stage types and each stage-specific item.

You can configure stages in Add Build Pipeline or Edit Build Pipeline.

Common Items

Stage Settings page is organized as follows.

ItemExplanation
ToolsIf you want to specify and use a particular tool other than the default tools set in the stage, select
  • JDK
  • Maven
  • Git
  • Ant
  • Go
  • Gradle
  • NodeJS
Stage typesSelect the required stage from the list and enter the necessary information.
Stage nameEnter the stage name.
Table. Stage Input Item Configuration

Checkout

This stage executes the checkout command on the Git repository registered in the code repository.

Select Checkout as the stage type.

ItemExplanation
URLSelect the code repository to perform checkout.
Branch nameEnter the branch name to checkout.
Table. Checkout stage input items

Build

This is the stage that executes the command to build the application.

Select Build as the stage type.

ItemExplanation
languageSelect the programming language used by the application.
Build toolSelect the build tool used for building the application.
Provides default Shell commands based on the selected build tool.
Shell commandEnter the command to use for building the application.
All commands available in the Shell can be used.
Table. Build Stage Input Items

Docker Build

This stage performs the Docker image build.

Select Docker Build as the stage type.

item
Explanationexample
Registry URL (docker push)Select the image repository where the Docker build result image will be pushed.
IDThe ID value of the account to be used for the image repository
image tag patternThe Docker image tag is automatically generated according to the selected pattern.
  • {YYYYMMDD}: year, month, and day
  • {HHMMSS}: hour, minute, and second
  • {BUILD_NUM}: the number of the current build pipeline execution
  • {YYYYMMDD}.{HHMMSS}: 20200414.150938
  • {YYYYMMDD}.{BUILD_NUM}: 20220414.13
Add base image repositoryAdd Base Image Repository A popup window opens.
Registry URL (docker pull)Select the image repository for docker pull when the repository providing the Base Image used in the Dockerfile (FROM clause, docker pull) differs from the repository of the Registry URL (docker push).
Image build toolDisplays the image build tool.
Pre-build commandIf there are any commands that need to be run before building a Docker image, write them in shell command format.cp target/*.jar docker/
Image Build folderIf you need to run the Docker image build from a specific folder, select the checkbox and enter the folder path.docker
DockerfileEnter the Dockerfile filename.Dockerfile
Image build optionsEnter it if you need to use additional options with the image build tool.--no-cache
Build commandDisplays the image build command that will actually be executed.
Post-build commandIf there are commands that need to be executed after building a Docker image, write them in Shell command format.rm -rf docker/*.jar
Table. Docker Build Stage Input Items

example script

The build pipeline script generated as a result of the example is as follows.

Example Script
Figure. Docker Build Example Script
ItemExplanation
Pre-build command
Image Build folder
Image build options
Post-build command
Table. Docker Build example script description

Deploy to K8S

This is the stage that performs a Kubernetes deployment.

Select Deploy to K8S as the stage type.

Item
Explanation
typeSelect deployment type
  • Helm release (Helm chart type)
  • Workload
  • ArgoCD
K8S clusterSelect a K8S cluster
  • Helm release (Helm chart type) When selected, a list of Helm releases deployed via the DevOps Console is displayed.
namespacePlease select a namespace.
Helm releaseSelect HelmRelease.
Deployment methodSelect deployment method
  • Recreate
  • Rolling Update
Registry URLSelect the image repository where the image to be deployed to Kubernetes has been docker pushed.
SecretSelect the secret information input method
  • Auto-generate: Automatically create the secret corresponding to the selected image repository from the Registry URL in the DevOps Console and use it.
  • Use existing secret: Use a pre-created secret through K8S secret management.
Table. Deploy to K8S stage input items

Deploy to VM

This is the stage that performs VM deployment.

Select Deploy to VM as the stage type.

ItemExplanation
Deployment configurationSelect deployment configuration method
  • Set deployment target (SSH command/Agent): Deploy using SSH commands or an Agent.
  • Write script manually: The user enters all commands directly to deploy.
deployment groupSelect a deployment group
Release InformationThe contents stored in the deployment group are automatically configured.
Manual deploymentSelect the default value for manual deployment
  • Select the default setting for manual deployment parameters when running the pipeline.
Table. Deploy to VM stage input items

Trigger Build

This is a stage that runs the pipeline remotely.

Select Trigger Build as the stage type.

ItemExplanation
Target pipelineChoose the target pipeline to run remotely.
The selectable items vary depending on whether the pipeline is for development or production.
Parameter informationIt is displayed depending on whether the target pipeline’s parameters are set.
The parameter information entered at pipeline execution time is used.
Table. Trigger Build Stage Input Items

Check Remote Execution Information

Remote execution information (parent/child pipelines) through the Trigger Build stage can be viewed on the Build Details screen.

Other stages

ItemExplanation
ArchiveArchive the application build results. The archived file can be downloaded from Jenkins.
Code QualityThis is the stage for executing the Code Quality step.
CustomThe user directly writes the pipeline script in the desired format.
Table. Other Stage Settings

2.4.1.2 - Multibranch Pipeline

Reference
For detailed information about Jenkins multibranch pipelines, refer to the official site.

Users can integrate multiple branches of a code repository through a multibranch pipeline and manage them as a single job.

Starting a Multibranch Pipeline

To start using a multibranch pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Build Pipeline menu. You will be taken to the Build Pipeline page.

Add a multibranch pipeline

To add a multibranch pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Build Pipeline menu. You will be taken to the Build Pipeline page.
  3. On the Build Pipeline page, click the Add Multi-branch Pipeline button at the top right. The Add Multi-branch Pipeline popup will open.
  4. Add Multi-branch Pipeline In the popup window, enter each field and click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    CategorySelect development or operation
    Jenkins URLSelect the Jenkins to add a multibranch pipeline from the list.
    Folder typeSelect folder type
    • Existing folder: Add a pipeline under a folder that already exists in Jenkins.
    • New folder: Create a new folder in Jenkins and add a pipeline under it.
    Folder nameSelect a folder from the list or enter the name of a new folder to create.
    pipeline namePlease enter the pipeline name.
    Git RepositorySelect the code repository to perform builds per branch.
    Only code repositories registered in the DevOps Console project can be selected.
    Branch filteringYou can filter the branch names to build among the branches registered in the code repository.
    When using filtering, enter the filter condition as a Java regular expression.
    Jenkinsfile pathEnter the path within the code repository of the Jenkinsfile where the pipeline build is defined.
    Table. Multi-branch pipeline additional information input items

Managing Multi-Branch Pipelines

Multi-branch pipeline list

ItemExplanation
Multi-branch icon and labelIcons and labels representing a multibranch pipeline are displayed.
URLNavigate to the Jenkins Multibranch Pipeline page.
Scan logMulti-branch pipeline scan log The popup window opens.
ScanScanning the multibranch pipeline.
View moreDisplays additional menu.
  • Edit pipeline
  • Delete pipeline
  • Build history
Table. Multi-branch pipeline list screen items

Scanning a multibranch pipeline

To scan a multibranch pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Build Pipeline page, click the Scan button of the multibranch pipeline card you want to scan.
  2. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup.

View multi-branch pipeline scan logs

To view the scan logs of a multibranch pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. Build Pipeline page, click the Scan Log button of the multibranch pipeline card for which you want to view the scan log. The Multibranch Pipeline Scan Log popup window opens.
  2. Multi-branch pipeline scan log After reviewing the contents in the popup window, click the Confirm button to exit.

View multi-branch pipeline build history

To view the build history for each branch in a multibranch pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Build Pipeline page, click the More icon of the multibranch pipeline card for which you want to view the build history.
  2. Click the Build History menu. You will be taken to the Branch-specific Build History screen of Jenkins. (This feature is not provided in DevOps Console)

Modify multi-branch pipeline

To modify a multibranch pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Build Pipeline page, click the More icon of the multibranch pipeline card you want to edit.
  2. Click the Edit Pipeline menu. You will be taken to the Settings screen of Jenkins. (Feature not provided in DevOps Console)

Delete Multi-branch Pipeline

To delete a multibranch pipeline, follow these steps.

  1. On the Build Pipeline page, click the More icon of the multibranch pipeline card you want to delete.
  2. Click the Delete Pipeline menu. The Delete Pipeline popup window opens.
  3. In the Delete Pipeline popup, select whether to Delete the pipeline in Jenkins as well, and click the Confirm button.
Reference

Delete the pipeline in Jenkins as well.

  • Selection: The pipeline is actually deleted in Jenkins.
  • Unselected: Build pipeline is deleted only from the list and remains in Jenkins.

2.4.2 - Kubernetes Deployment

Users can view the list of Helm releases used in the project and their deployment status. Depending on the development classification, the releases appear in the development or production list when the project is created or a chart is installed.

Users can differentiate deployments using icons.

  • 헬름차트 Helm chart
  • Istio Istio
  • 워크로드 Workload
  • 카나리 Canary(Canary)
  • 블루/그린 Blue/Green (Blue-Green)
  • ArgoCD ArgoCD

Getting Started with Kubernetes Deployment

To start using Kubernetes deployment, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.

2.4.2.1 - Helm Release

HelmRelease is an instance of a chart running on a Kubernetes cluster. Users can create a HelmRelease when creating a project or via the HelmInstall menu.

Getting Started with Helm Release

To start HelmRelease, follow these steps.

  1. From the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
    ItemExplanation
    NameDisplays the deployment name. Click to view detailed information.
    ChartDisplays the Helm chart information used for deployment.
    Cluster/NamespaceDisplays the deployed cluster/namespace.
    Pod statusDisplays the current status of the Pod.
    Deployment resultDisplays the deployment execution result.
    Deployment timeDisplays the deployment execution time.
    RefreshRefresh the current items. The items that will be updated are the Pod status, deployment result, and deployment time.
    DeleteDelete the current item.
    Table. Helm release items
  3. Kubernetes deployment page, click name in the Helm release list. You will be taken to the deployment details page.

Add Helm Release

Helm install

You can add a Helm release through Helm install.

Add related Helm release

To add the related Helm release, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deployment menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deployment page.
  3. Click the Add related Helm release button. The Add related Helm release popup opens.
  4. Add related Helm release Enter each item in the popup window.
  5. Click the Save button to complete adding the Helm release.
    ItemExplanation
    Helm release already registered in the projectShows the Helm release already registered in the project.
    • A Helm release already registered in the project cannot be added.
    Table. Items displayed when adding related Helm release

Managing Helm Release Secrets

Getting Started with Helm Release Secrets

In HelmRelease secrets, you can manage the ImagePull Secret used for images deployed through the build pipeline in HelmRelease.

To start HelmRelease secret management, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Edit Credentials icon to the right of Helm Release.
  2. Helm Release Secret The popup window opens.

Adding a secret to a Helm release

To add a Helm release secret, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Edit Authentication Info icon to the right of the Helm Release. The Helm Release Secret popup will open.
  2. Helm Release Secret popup window, if you need to add a secret to pull a private Chart Image, click the Add button in the Chart Install Secret area. The Add Secret popup will open.
  3. If you need to add a secret required to pull the App Image used during build/deployment, click the Add button in the ImagePull Secret area. The Add Secret popup will open.
  4. Add Secret In the popup window, enter the secret information and click the Save button to complete the addition.
    ItemExplanation
    Registry URLFrom the list of images registered in Image Repository, select the image that ImagePull Secret will use.
    SecretSelect secret input method
    • Auto-generate: Automatically create a secret using the credentials of the selected image repository from the Docker URL.
    • Use existing secret: Select and use one of the already created secrets.
    Table. Additional Helm Release Secret Configuration Items

Edit Helm Release Secret

To modify the Helm release secret, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Edit Authentication Info icon to the right of the Helm Release. The Helm Release Secret popup will open.
  2. In the HelmRelease secret list, click the secret name you want to edit. Secret Edit popup opens.
  3. Edit the content and click the Save button to complete the edit.

Delete Helm release secret

To delete a Helm release secret, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Edit Authentication Info icon to the right of the Helm Release. The Helm Release Secret popup will open.
  2. Click the secret name you want to delete from the Helm release secret list.
  3. Click the Delete button to complete the deletion.

Modify K8S credentials

K8S credentials are the authentication information used to verify permission to use a K8S cluster/namespace when performing a deployment in the build pipeline.

To modify the K8S credentials, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Edit Credentials icon to the right of K8S Cluster/Namespace. The Edit Credentials popup will open.
  2. Authentication information is fixed to the logged-in user’s account. Click the Save button to edit.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.
  4. K8S authentication information will be changed to the logged-in user.

Check the values.yaml used in the Helm release

To view the contents of values.yaml, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the History tab.
  2. Click the View icon in the Values column. Revision # - Values.yaml The popup window opens.
  3. Check the contents of the values.yaml file.

Comparing values.yaml used in Helm release

To compare the values.yaml contents used in each release, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the History tab on the Deployment Details page.
  2. In the list, click the check box of each of the two revisions you want to compare.
  3. Click the Yaml Diff button. The Yaml Diff popup window opens.
  4. Yaml Diff (Revision #>#) Check the comparison details in the popup window.

Rollback Helm Release

To roll back a Helm release to a previous revision, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the History tab.
  2. Click the Rollback button of the revision you want to roll back. The Rollback popup window will open.
  3. Click the Confirm button to complete the rollback.

Upgrade Helm Release

To upgrade HelmRelease, follow the following procedure.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the History tab.
  2. In the Values column, click the View icon. The Revision # - Values.yaml popup window opens.
  3. Modify the contents of Current Values.yaml, and click the Upgrade button. The Upgrade popup window will open.
  4. Check the upgrade information.
  5. Click the Run button to complete the upgrade.

View Pod logs

To view the logs of the Pod related to a Helm release, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Release Object tab.
  2. Click the view icon in the LOG column of the Pod entry. The Log popup window opens.
    ItemExplanation
    containerSelect the container from which you want to output logs.
    Real-time refreshRefresh the log output in real time.
    Refresh stoppedStop real-time refresh.
    DownloadDownload the Pod logs to a file.
    Table. Log popup window function description

Delete Helm Release

To delete HelmRelease, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Delete button at the lower right of the Helm Release. The Delete Helm Release popup opens.
  2. Click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.
Reference

Also execute the helm delete command.

  • Select: The Helm release is actually deleted from the cluster.
  • Unselected: Kubernetes deployment is removed only from the list and remains in the cluster.

2.4.2.2 - Workload

A workload is an application that runs on Kubernetes, and users can add workloads to the DevOps Console for management.

The workload types that can be managed from the DevOps Console are Deployment, StatefulSet, and DaemonSet.

Getting Started

To begin using the workload, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. On the Kubernetes Deployment page, click the workload name.
    ItemExplanation
    Workload typeDisplays the workload type.
    • Deployment
    • StatefulSet
    • DaemonSet
    NameDisplays the workload name. Click to view detailed information.
    ChartDisplays the Helm chart information used for deployment.
    Cluster/NamespaceDisplays the deployed cluster/namespace.
    Pod statusDisplays the current status of the Pod.
    Deployment resultDisplays the deployment execution result.
    Deployment timeDisplays the deployment execution time.
    RefreshRefresh the current items. The items that will be updated are the Pod status, deployment result, and deployment time.
    DeleteDelete the current item.
    Table. Workload screen items

Add workload

To add a workload, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. On the Kubernetes deployment page, click the Add workload menu. The Add workload popup opens.
  4. Add Workload Enter the information in the popup window and click the Save button.
  5. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete adding the workload.
    Item
    Explanation
    Query targetOnly workloads deployed with the same Base image as the App template used when the project was first created are displayed.
    Workload already registered in the projectShows the workload already registered in the project.
    • Workloads already registered in the project cannot be added.
    Table. Additional Workload Input Items

Modify K8S authentication information

K8S credentials are the authentication information used to verify permission to use a K8S cluster/namespace when performing a deployment in the build pipeline.

To modify the K8S credentials, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Edit Credentials icon to the right of K8S Cluster/Namespace. The Edit Credentials popup will open.
  2. Authentication information is fixed to the logged-in user’s account. Click the Save button to edit.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.
  4. K8S authentication information will be changed to the logged-in user.

Rollback Workload

To roll back the workload to a previous image, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deployment menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deployment page.
  3. Kubernetes deployment page, click the workload name to roll back. You will be taken to the Workload details page.
  4. Click the Details tab on the Workload Details page.
  5. In the Details tab list, click the Rollback button in the row that contains the image you want to roll back. The Rollback popup window opens.
  6. Rollback popup window, click the desired button to complete the rollback.
    • Recreate
    • Rolling Update

Add recipient to deployment results

To add a distribution result recipient, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Deployment Result Recipients tab on the Workload Details page.
  2. Click the Add button on the Distribution Result Recipients tab. The Add Distribution Result Recipients popup window opens.
  3. Add Distribution Result Recipients In the popup window, select the target and click the Confirm button to complete adding distribution result recipients.
    • Search button or click an entry in the list to add the recipient to the lower part of the popup.
    • Added recipients can be removed by clicking the X icon on the right.

Delete workload

To delete the workload, follow these steps.

  1. On the Kubernetes deployment page, click the X icon of the workload you want to delete.
  2. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.
    Reference
    Workloads are not deleted in the actual cluster.
    If you want to delete in the actual cluster, delete it using the same method you used to initially deploy the workload.

2.4.2.3 - Blue/Green Deployment

Users can perform blue/green deployments using Ingress or Service.

Adding a blue/green deployment means creating a new K8S Ingress or K8S Service so that the two Helm releases can be swapped.

Only two Helm releases that have the same project, cluster, namespace, release type, chart name, chart version, development classification can be grouped.

Starting Blue/Green Deployment

To start using blue/green deployment, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
    Item
    Explanation
    NameDisplays the blue/green deployment name. Click to view detailed information.
    Cluster/NamespaceDisplays the deployed cluster/namespace.
    (operation)Displays information about the currently deployed Helm release.
    (operational standby)Shows the Helm release that will be the next version in operation. Using blue/green switching, the standby switches to active.
    DeleteDelete the current item.
    Table. Kubernetes deployment screen Blue/Green deployment card items
  3. Click the name of the Blue/Green deployment you want to start from the deployment list on the Kubernetes deployment page. You will be taken to the Deployment details page.

Add blue/green deployment

To add a blue/green deployment, follow these steps.

Reference
To add a blue/green deployment, you need two Helm releases installed with the same chart.
  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. Click the Add Blue/Green Deployment button at the top right of the Kubernetes deployment page. The Add Blue/Green Deployment popup opens.
  4. Add Blue/Green deployment After entering the information in the popup window, click the Save button to complete adding the Blue/Green deployment.
    Item
    Explanation
    CategorySelect Development, Operations
    Blue/Green deployment nameEnter the deployment name.
    OperationRelease and Jenkins Job selection
    • Release name: Select the name of the currently running Helm release from the list.
    • Jenkins Job: Select the Jenkins Job from the list to build/deploy the selected Helm release.
    StandbyRelease and Jenkins Job selection
    • Release name: Select the name of the Helm release to be applied to production in the next version from the list.
    • Jenkins Job: Select the Jenkins Job from the list to build/deploy the selected Helm release.
    K8S cluster/namespaceDisplays the K8S cluster/namespace where the Helm release is installed.
    Type classificationSelect whether to use Ingress or Service to perform a blue/green switch.
    New classificationChoose whether to create a new Ingress or Service, or use an existing one.
    NameEnter name
    • New: Enter the name of an Ingress or Service.
    • Existing: Select an already created Ingress or Service from the list.
    Service (Operation)Select the Kubernetes Service related to the currently running Helm release from the list.
    Service (Operational Standby)Select the Kubernetes Service related to the Helm release that will be applied to operations in the next version from the list.
    RulesEnter the information to be used for Ingress.
    Table. Ingress type input items when adding blue/green deployment
    ItemExplanation
    typeSelect the type of Kubernetes Service from the list
    • ClusterIP
    • NodePort
    • LoadBalancer
    Deployment (Production)Select the Kubernetes Deployment related to the currently running Helm release from the list.
    Deployment (Operational standby)Select the Kubernetes Deployment related to the Helm release that will be operated in the next version from the list.
    PortsEnter the information to be used by the Service.
    Table. Service type input items when adding Blue/Green deployment

Replace Blue/Green

To replace the blue/green, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Blue/Green Switch button on the Deployment Details page. The Blue/Green Switch popup opens.
  2. In the Blue/Green replacement popup, click the Confirm button to complete the Blue/Green replacement.
    • The Helm releases for production and staging are being swapped.
    • A replacement record will be added.

Check the yaml of Ingress or Service for blue/green deployment

To check the yaml of the Ingress or Service used in blue/green, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the view icon for Ingress YAML or Service YAML. The Ingress YAML or Service YAML popup window opens.
  2. Ingress YAML or Service YAML popup window, review the contents and click the Confirm button to exit.

Managing Jenkins Jobs for Blue/Green Deployments

Jenkins Job View Log

To view the Jenkins Job log, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Log button in the Jenkins Job entry for the desired release. The Pipeline Log popup window opens.
  2. Pipeline Log After confirming the log in the popup window, click the Confirm button.

Running a Jenkins Job

To run a Jenkins job, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Run button in the Jenkins Job entry for the desired release. The Enter Pipeline Execution Parameters popup will open.
  2. Pipeline Execution Parameter Input In the popup window, enter or select each item, then click the Confirm button to complete the Jenkins Job execution.

Modify blue/green deployment

To modify a blue/green deployment, follow these steps.

  1. Deployment Details page, click the Edit button. The Blue/Green Deployment Edit popup window opens.
  2. Blue/Green Deployment Edit In the popup window, modify the desired items and click the Save button to complete the edit.

Delete blue/green deployment

To delete a blue/green deployment, follow these steps.

  1. Deployment Details page, click the Delete button. The Blue/Green Deployment Delete popup opens.
  2. Blue/Green deployment deletion in the popup window, select whether to execute the Ingress/Service deletion command, and click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.
Reference

Execute Ingress/Service deletion command

  • Selection: The Ingress or Service used for blue/green deployment is actually deleted from the cluster.
  • Unselected: Ingress or Service used for blue/green deployment is not deleted and remains in the cluster.

2.4.2.4 - Canary Deployment

The user can add a canary deployment.

Adding a canary means configuring two Helm releases together so that a canary test can be performed.

Only two Helm releases that have the same Project, Cluster, Release Type, Chart Name, Chart Version, and Development Classification can be grouped.

Getting Started with Canary Deployment

To start using Canary, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
    ItemExplanation
    NameDisplays the Canary name. Click to view detailed information.
    clusterDisplays the deployed cluster.
    (operation)Displays the currently running Helm release.
    (Canary)Displays the HelmRelease that is in Canary.
    ExitShutting down Canary.
    Table. Kubernetes deployment screen Canary card items
  3. On the Kubernetes deployment page, click the name of the canary you want to use in the deployment list. You will be taken to the deployment details page.

Add Canary

To add a canary, follow these steps.

Reference

Canary is supported in the following environments. Verify before adding Canary.

  • Kubernetes v1.17 or later
  • nginx-ingress v0.29.0 or later
information
Adding a canary requires two Helm releases installed with the same chart.
  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left sidebar. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. Click the Add Canary button at the top right of the Kubernetes Deployment page. The Add Canary popup opens.
  4. Add Canary In the popup window, after entering the information, click the Save button to complete adding the canary.
    ItemExplanation
    CategorySelect Development or Operations.
    Canary nameEnter the canary name.
    Operation
    • Release name: Select the name of the currently deployed Helm release from the list.
    • Jenkins Job: Select the Jenkins job for building/deploying the currently deployed Helm release from the list.
    Canary
    • Release name: Select the name of the Helm release that will be the next version in operation from the list.
    • Jenkins Job: Select the Jenkins job that will build/deploy the Helm release for the next operational version from the list.
    K8S clusterDisplays the K8S cluster where the Helm release is installed.
    Ingress annotationEnter the annotation item you want to apply among the Canary annotations provided by nginx-ingress.
    Table. Canary Additional Input Items
Reference
For detailed guidance on each ingress annotation provided by nginx-ingress, refer to the following page.

Check Canary’s Ingress YAML

Operational Ingress YAML used in Canary, to view the Canary Ingress YAML, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the View icon for Production Ingress YAML and Canary Ingress YAML. The Ingress YAML popup opens.
  2. Ingress YAML Check the contents in the popup window and click the Confirm button to exit.

Managing Canary’s Jenkins Job

View Jenkins Job log

To view the Jenkins Job log, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Log button in the Jenkins Job entry for the desired release. The Pipeline Log popup window will open.
  2. Pipeline Log After confirming the log in the popup window, click the Confirm button.

Running a Jenkins Job

To run a Jenkins job, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Run button in the Jenkins Job entry for the desired release. The Enter Pipeline Execution Parameters popup will open.
  2. Pipeline Execution Parameter Input In the popup window, enter or select each item, then click the Confirm button to complete the Jenkins job execution.

Modify Canary

To modify the canary, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Edit button. The Canary Edit popup window opens.
  2. Canary Edit In the popup window, modify the desired items and click the Save button to complete the edit.

Recover Canary

If the ingress annotation data for the production and canary releases fails to operate correctly due to a Helm release change, restore it so it works properly again.

To restore the canary, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Restore button. The Restore popup window opens.
  2. In the Recovery popup, click the Confirm button to complete the recovery.

Delete Canary (termination)

To shut down Canary, follow these steps.

  1. On the Deployment Details page, click the Terminate button. The Canary Termination popup window opens.
  2. Canary termination In the popup window, select the desired item and click the Confirm button to complete the termination.
    item
    Explanation
    Canary releaseSelect Canary Release
    • Rollback Ingress Host: Restores the Ingress host of the Helm release used for the canary to its original value.
    • Delete Helm Release: Deletes the Helm release that was used for the canary.
    Production ReleaseSelect the production release
    • Upgrade to the canary image: Upgrade the production Helm release to the image used in the canary. You can modify the Values.yaml file.
    • No action: End the canary without any changes to the production Helm release.
    Table. Canary termination selection items

2.4.2.5 - Istio

Reference
For detailed guidance on Istio, refer to the following page.
The list of Istio Traffic management Objects supported by the DevOps Console is as follows.

  • Gateway
  • Virtual Service
  • Destination Rule

Getting Started with Istio

To start using Istio, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
    ItemExplanation
    NameDisplays the Istio name. Click to view detailed information.
    Cluster/NamespaceDisplays the deployed cluster/namespace.
    DeleteDelete the current item.
    Table. Kubernetes deployment screen Istio card items
  3. In the deployment list on the Kubernetes Deployment page, click the name of the Istio you want to use. You will be taken to the Istio Details page.

Add Istio

To add Istio, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. Click the Add Istio button at the top right of the Kubernetes deployment page. Add Istio popup opens.
  4. Add Istio In the popup window, after entering the information, click the Save button to add Istio.
    ItemExplanation
    CategorySelect Development or Operations.
    K8S clusterPlease select a K8S cluster.
    NamespaceSelect a namespace.
    Only namespaces that can use Istio are displayed in the list.
    Table. Istio Additional Input Items
Reference

Istio has been added, but since no Istio objects have been created, Istio-related functionality cannot be used yet.

Add Istio object using the creation wizard or Add Istio object using object addition to add and use an Istio object.

Istio objects

Adding Istio object

Add Istio object using the creation wizard

  1. On the Istio details page, click the Istio objects tab.
  2. Click the Create Wizard button in the Istio objects tab. You will be taken to the Create Wizard page.

Helm Release

This step selects the Helm release to use with Istio.

  1. Create Wizard page, click the Add button to select all Helm releases to be used in Istio.
  2. Click the Start button. The Gateway screen appears.

Gateway

The Istio Gateway is the frontmost object that receives traffic from external sources.

  1. On the Gateway screen of the Creation Wizard page, select whether to create a Gateway.
    • If you want to create a Gateway, enter each item.
    • If you do not want to create a Gateway, select Pass without creating an Object.
  2. Click the Next button. The Destination Rule screen appears.
    ItemExplanation
    Name PrefixSpecify the prefix name of the Istio Gateway object to be created.
    HostSpecifies the domain of the Gateway Object accessed from outside.
    Table. Creation Wizard Gateway Input Items

Destination Rule

Destination Rule defines traffic policies in Istio.

  1. On the Create Wizard page’s Destination Rule screen, select whether to create a Destination Rule.
    • If you want to create a Destination Rule, fill in each field.
    • If you do not want to create a Destination Rule, select Pass without creating the Object.
  2. Click the Next button. The Virtual Service screen appears.
    ItemExplanation
    Name PrefixEnter the Prefix name for the Istio Destination Rule Object to be created.
    LoadBalancerSelect the load balancer mode.
    • ROUND_ROBIN: Round Robin
    • LEAST_CONN: Continue using the last connection
    • RANDOM: Random
    maxConnectionsEnter the maximum allowed number of connections.
    Table. Creation Wizard Destination Rule Input Items

Virtual Service

The Virtual Service routes incoming traffic to a service.

  1. On the Creation Wizard page’s Virtual Service screen, if you want to create a Virtual Service, fill in each field.
  2. Click the Complete button to finish adding an Istio object using the creation wizard.
    ItemExplanation
    Name PrefixEnter the prefix name for the Istio Virtual Service to create.
    Prefix-UriEnter a prefix URI to enable routing when traffic arrives at that URI.
    Helm Release WeightIf there are two or more helm releases, enter the connection weight. The sum of each number must be 100.
    Table. Create Wizard Virtual Service Input Items

Add an Istio object using Object addition

  1. On the Istio details page, click the Istio objects tab.
  2. Click the Add Object button in the Istio objects tab. The Add Object popup window opens.
  3. Add Object In the popup window, fill in each field and click the Save button to finish adding the Istio object.
    ItemExplanation
    ObjectSelect the Object to create
    • Gateway
    • Virtual Service
    • Destination Rule
    inputThe input fields differ for each object. Refer to the creation wizard for input
    • Gateway
    • Virtual Service
    • Destination Rule
    GenerateClick the Generate button. Based on the information entered earlier, a default Yaml will be generated in the Yaml area.
    YamlModify the base YAML to complete the final YAML of the object you want to generate.
    SaveClick the Save button to create an Object.
    Table. Screen items for adding an Istio object using Object addition

Modify Istio object

To modify an Istio object, follow these steps.

  1. On the Istio details page, click the Istio objects tab.
  2. In the Istio objects tab, click the Object you want to edit from the Istio object list. The Object popup opens.
  3. Object In the popup window, edit the Yaml and click the Save button to complete the Istio object modification.

Delete Istio object

To delete an Istio object, follow these steps.

  1. On the Istio Details page, click the Istio objects tab.
  2. In the Istio objects tab, click the Object you want to edit from the Istio object list. The Object popup window will open.
  3. In the Object popup, click the Delete button to complete the deletion of the Istio object.

Helm release

Add Helm Release

To add the Helm release used by Istio, follow these steps.

  1. On the Istio details page, click the Helm Release tab.
  2. In the Helm Release tab, click the Add button. The Add Helm Release popup opens.
  3. Add Helm Release In the popup window, fill out each field and click the Save button to complete adding the Helm release.

Delete Helm Release

To delete the Helm release used by Istio, follow these steps.

  1. On the Istio Details page, click the Helm Release tab.
  2. In the Helm release tab, select the checkbox of the Helm release you want to delete and click the Delete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the Helm release deletion.

Delete Istio

To uninstall Istio, follow these steps.

  1. On the Istio Details page, click the Delete button at the lower right.
  2. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete the deletion.

2.4.2.6 - ArgoCD

ArgoCD is software used for GitOps deployments in a Kubernetes environment. Users can configure deployments via ArgoCD when creating a project or through the Kubernetes deployment menu.

Getting Started with ArgoCD

To view the details of an ArgoCD application, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. Click the ArgoCD application card you want to start from the list. You will be taken to the deployment details page.
    Item
    Explanation
    NameDisplays the ArgoCD project name/ArgoCD URL.
    Git informationDisplays the Git information used for deployment.
    Cluster/NamespaceDisplays the deployed cluster/namespace.
    App statusDisplays the current state of the App.
    Deployment resultDisplays the current Sync status.
    Deployment timeDisplays the deployment execution time.
    RefreshClick the Refresh icon to refresh the current item. The items that are updated are App status, deployment result.
    DeleteDelete the current item.
    Table. ArgoCD Application Detailed Items
    Item
    Explanation
    Modify ArgoCD app secretClick the Edit credentials icon to the right of the application name to open a popup that manages the image secret used for deployment.
    Go to the ArgoCD appThe actual ArgoCD tool’s Application Details screen opens in a new window.
    Table. ArgoCD Deployment Details

Adding an ArgoCD Application

Create and add a new ArgoCD application - generate with Helm chart

To create and add a new ArgoCD application using a Helm chart, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deployment menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deployment page.
  3. Click the Create New ArgoCD App button at the top right. You will be taken to the Create New ArgoCD App page.
  4. Enter ArgoCD information and click the Confirm button. The authentication information input field appears.
  5. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  6. Application Basic Information, Deployment Target K8S Cluster input fields appear.
  7. Enter the Application Name and click the Check Duplicate button.
  8. Enter Project Name.
  9. Select Repository type as Create a new repository as a Helm chart.
  10. Select a K8S cluster and namespace.
  11. Select Helm chart. Information about the Helm chart and the Helm chart Git repository will be displayed.
  12. After modifying the contents of the default Values.yaml included in the chart located in the K8S cluster Values of the Helm chart, click the Validation Check button.
  13. After entering the Helm chart Git repository information, click the Connection Test button.
  14. Manifest Keys Enter the information.
  15. Click the Create button to complete creation.
Reference
In the Manifest file and Key information, Deploy Strategy is not a required input.
ItemExplanation
URL input methodSelect URL input method
  • Select from list: the ArgoCD tools registered as tools appear.
  • Enter manually
ArgoCD URLAfter entering the ArgoCD URL, click the Confirm button.
Authentication informationEnter the credentials and click the Connection Test button.
Application nameEnter the ArgoCD application name and click the Check Duplicate button.
Project nameEnter the project name of the ArgoCD application.
Repository typeSelect repository type
  • Create a new repository with Helm chart: Use a Helm chart to create a Git repository for GitOps.
  • Use existing Git repository
K8S clusterSelect the target cluster for deployment
  • Only clusters that the user has access rights to among the DevOps Console K8S clusters can be selected.
NamespaceSelect the target namespace for deployment
  • In the K8S cluster, you can only select namespaces that the user has access rights to among the selected clusters.
Helm chartPlease select a Helm chart.
Helm chart Git repositoryEnter the information of the Git repository to be used for GitOps.
Manifest Key InformationEnter the Manifest file/key information to be used for continuous deployment.
Table. New ArgoCD Application Creation - Settings for creation with Helm chart

Create and add a new ArgoCD application – create from an existing Git repository

To create and add a new ArgoCD application using an existing Git repository, follow the steps below.

  1. Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deploy menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deploy page.
  3. Click the Create New ArgoCD App button at the top right. You will be taken to the Create New ArgoCD App page.
  4. Enter ArgoCD information and click the Confirm button. The Authentication information input field appears.
  5. Enter authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
  6. Application Basic Information, Deployment Target K8S Cluster input fields appear.
  7. Enter the Application Name and click the Check Duplicate button.
  8. Enter the Project Name.
  9. Select Repository type as Use existing Git repository.
  10. Select K8S cluster and namespace.
  11. Select Helm chart. Information about Helm chart and Helm chart Git repository appears.
  12. After modifying the contents of the default Values.yaml included in the chart located in the K8S cluster Values of the Helm chart, click the Validation Check button.
  13. Enter the Helm chart Git repository information and click the Connection Test button.
  14. Enter the Manifest Root path, Manifest type, (values.yaml path if the Manifest type is Helm), and the Manifest file and key information (Image repository, Image tag, Image Secret, Deploy Strategy) for Manifest Keys.
  15. Click the Create button to complete creation.
    Reference
    In the Manifest file and key information, the Deploy Strategy is not a required input.
    Item
    Explanation
    URL input methodSelect URL input method
    • Select from list: ArgoCD tools registered as tools appear.
    • Enter manually
    ArgoCD URLAfter entering the ArgoCD URL, click the Confirm button.
    authentication informationEnter the authentication information and click the Connection Test button.
    Application nameEnter the ArgoCD application name and click the Check Duplicate button.
    Project nameEnter the project name of the ArgoCD application.
    Repository typeSelect repository type
    • Create a new repository with Helm chart: Use a Helm chart to create a Git repository for GitOps.
    • Use existing Git repository
    K8S clusterSelect the target cluster for deployment
    • Only clusters that the user has permission to access can be selected from the clusters in the DevOps Console K8S cluster.
    namespaceSelect the target namespace for deployment
    • In the K8S cluster, only namespaces that the user has access rights to can be selected from the chosen cluster.
    Git repositoryEnter the Git repository information that stores the Manifest data for creating the ArgoCD application to be used in GitOps.
    Manifest Keys informationEnter the information required for continuous deployment (Manifest Root path, Manifest type (Helm, Customize, Directory), Manifest file/key information).
    Table. New ArgoCD application creation - Settings for creating with existing Git repository

Add existing ArgoCD application

To add an existing ArgoCD application, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deployment menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deployment page.
  3. Click the Add ArgoCD App button at the top right. Navigate to the Add ArgoCD App page.
  4. Enter the ArgoCD URL and click the Confirm button.
  5. The input screen for the existing application name and credentials appears.
  6. Enter the Existing Application Name and Authentication Information, then click the Connection Test button.
    Reference
    If the Git repository linked to the ArgoCD application is not registered in the DevOps Console, the URL Check popup window opens. Follow steps 7–8.
  7. A URL Check popup opens to identify the Git repository linked to the ArgoCD application.
  8. After modifying the Base URL, click the Confirm button.
  9. The Git repository information linked to the application is displayed.
  10. Enter the authentication information for the Git repository and click the Connection Test button.
  11. Enter the yaml file and key to modify among the Manifest Keys items.
  12. After entering the information, click the Save button to complete Add ArgoCD Application.
    item
    Explanation
    URL input methodSelect URL input method
    • Select from list: ArgoCD tools registered as tools appear.
    • Enter manually
    ArgoCD URLAfter entering the ArgoCD URL, click the Confirm button.
    Application name / authentication informationEnter the Existing application name and authentication information, then click the Connection Test button.
    Git repository credentialsEnter the credentials for the Git repository used by the selected existing application.
    Image Repo KeyEnter the path to the Yaml file that records the image repository information and the Key value. If the key values for repository and tag are the same, enter the same value.
    Image Tag KeyEnter the path to the Yaml file containing the image tag information and the Key value. If the repository and tag have the same key, enter the same value.
    Image Secret KeyEnter the path to the Yaml file that contains the image secret information and the Key value.
    Deploy Strategy KeyEnter the path to the Yaml file containing the deployment strategy information and the Key value. (It is not required.)
    Table. Adding Existing ArgoCD Application Configuration Items

Managing ArgoCD Applications

To view the details of an ArgoCD application, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Deployment menu in the left sidebar. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Deployment page.
  3. Click the ArgoCD application card you want to start from the list. You will be taken to the deployment details page.

Modify Manifest information

Follow these steps to modify the Manifest information.

  1. Git related information Click the tab.
  2. Click the Edit icon next to Manifest information. The Edit Manifest key information popup opens.
  3. Modify the Manifest key value and click the Save button.

Modify ArgoCD authentication information

To modify the ArgoCD credentials, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Edit icon next to the ArgoCD User ID. The Edit Authentication Info popup will open.
  2. Modify the authentication information value and click the Save button to complete the edit.

Modify linked Git repository credentials

To modify the authentication information of the linked Git repository, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Edit icon next to Linked Git ID. The Edit authentication information popup opens.
  2. Modify the authentication information and click the Save button to complete the changes.

Configure Sync

To change the Sync settings, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Sync icon next to Current Sync. The ArgoCD App Sync popup opens.
  2. Enter the content to edit and click the Sync button to complete the Sync settings.
    ItemExplanation
    RevisionSelect the branch to synchronize.
    Sync OptionsSelect the synchronization-related options.
    Synchronize ResourcesSelect the synchronization target.
    Table. Sync Settings
    Reference
    ArgoCD For detailed information about synchronization, please refer to the official site.

Configure Auto-Sync

To change the Auto-Sync settings of an ArgoCD application, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Edit icon next to Auto‑Sync. The Auto‑Sync option popup window opens.
  2. Edit and click the Save button to complete the settings.
    Itemdescription
    Prune ResourcesWhen the Git settings are deleted, choose whether to also delete the synchronization target.
    Self HealIn the cluster, when the value of synchronization target changes, select whether to automatically change it to the value defined in Git.
    Table. Auto-Sync Settings

Managing Application Secrets

If it is an ArgoCD application created with a Helm chart, you can add, modify, or delete the application’s secrets.

To start application secret management, follow these steps.

  1. Click the application secret to the right of the application name.
  2. Application Secret Settings popup window opens.

Add application secret

To add an application secret, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Edit authentication information icon next to the Application name. The Application secret settings popup opens.
  2. If you need to add a secret to use when pulling the Chart Image, click the Add button in the Chart Install Secret section.
  3. When you need to add a secret for pulling the App Image used during build/deployment, click the Add button in the ImagePull Secret section.
  4. Enter the content and click the Save button to complete the addition.
    Item
    description
    Registry URLFrom the list of images registered in Image Repository, select the image that ImagePull Secret will use.
    SecretSelect the method for entering ImagePull Secret information
    • Auto-generate: Use the credentials of the image repository selected from the Docker URL to automatically create an ImagePull Secret.
    • Use existing secret: Choose one of the already created secrets to use as the ImagePull Secret.
    Table. Application Secret Additional Configuration Items

Edit Application Secret

To modify the application secret, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Edit authentication information icon next to the Application name. The Application secret settings popup opens.
  2. Click the secret name you want to edit in the application secret list.
  3. Enter the content and click the Save button to complete the edit.

Delete Application Secret

To delete the application secret, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Edit Authentication Info icon next to Application Name. The Application Secret Settings popup opens.
  2. Click the secret name you want to delete from the application secret list.
  3. Click the Delete button to complete the deletion.

Comparing Values.yaml file

For an ArgoCD application using a Helm chart, you can compare the values.yaml file.

To compare the values.yaml files used in each release, follow these steps.

  1. Click the History tab.
  2. Click the two revisions you want to compare.
  3. Click the App Diff button. The App Diff popup window opens.

Rolling Back an Application

To roll back the application to a previous revision, follow these steps.

  1. Click the History tab.
  2. Click the Rollback button in the rollback column of the revision you want to roll back. The Rollback popup will open.
  3. Click the Confirm button to complete the rollback.

Delete Application

To uninstall the application, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Delete button at the bottom right. The Application Delete popup will open.
  2. Click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.
Reference
It is deleted only from DevOps Console, and the actual ArgoCD application is not deleted.

2.4.3 - VM Deployment

Users can register and manage VM deployment through DevOps Console.
Before registering a VM deployment, an available VM server group(VM server group) must exist, and the registered VM deployment can be used in the build pipeline (Deploy to VM).
Users can differentiate deployment methods using icons.

  • (SSH 방식) VM 배포 (SSH method) VM deployment
  • (Agent 방식) VM 배포 (Agent mode) VM deployment
Note
Differences by deployment method: Table. SSH method vs Agent method

Start VM deployment

To start VM deployment, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > VM Deploy menu. You will be taken to the VM Deploy page.
    ItemExplanation
    Deployment group nameDisplays the name of the deployment group.
    VM deployment result(Success)/(Total): Displays the number of VM servers targeted for deployment and the number of VM servers successfully deployed.
    • Green: All successful
    • Blue: In progress
    • Red: Partial failure
    • Gray: Ready, Stopped
    Deployment timeDisplays the deployment time.
    DeleteDelete the VM deployment.
    Table. VM deployment display items

Add VM deployment

To add a VM deployment, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > VM Deploy menu. You will be taken to the VM Deploy page.
  3. VM Deployment page, click the Add VM Deployment button in the top right. The Add VM Deployment popup opens.
  4. Add VM deployment After entering the information in the popup window, click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    deployment groupPlease enter the deployment group name.
    Execution methodSelect the execution mode.
    • File transfer and command execution: Choose this when you typically deploy files to a VM.
    • Execute command only: Choose this when you run only commands without transferring files to the VM (e.g., Docker commands).
    Deployment methodSelect deployment method
    Deployment orderIf there are multiple target servers, choose whether to deploy in parallel or sequentially.
    Deployment target VMSet the deployment target server.
    • Click the Settings button to open the Configure Deployment Target VM popup.
    Command before file deploymentWrite the commands that need to be executed before file distribution.
    File to send
    • Source: Enter the file path after the build pipeline execution directory (Jenkins workspace).
    • Target: Enter the path where the file will be deployed on the VM server.
    • Add button can be used to add files.
    Command after file distributionWrite the commands to be executed after file deployment.
    Automatic restore settingSelect whether to enable automatic rollback
    • If the deployment fails, it will be rolled back to the most recent successful deployment.
    • Deployment method is enabled when it is Agent.
    Artifact repositorySelect whether to use the artifact repository for rollback.
    • deployment method is activated when it is Agent.
    Repository nameOnly exposed when using an artifact repository.
    • A list of already registered artifact repository is displayed
    Table. Additional Input Items for VM Deployment
Note

Deployment Target VM Settings The popup window displays the server groups you have access to.

For more details, refer to the VM Server Group.

VM Deployment Details

To view the detailed information of the VM deployment, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > VM Deploy menu. You will be taken to the VM Deploy page.
  3. On the VM deployment page, in the VM deployment list, click the VM deployment you want to view in detail. You will be taken to the VM deployment details page.
  4. In the History tab, click the server list. The Deployment Details popup opens.
  5. Deployment Details You can view the detailed history in the popup window.
  6. When you click the Log button of the execution pipeline, the Pipeline Log popup window opens.
  7. Pipeline Log You can view detailed logs in the popup window.
  8. In the history list for each deployment server, click the Log button of the server whose logs you want to view, and the VM Agent Log popup window will open.
  9. VM Agent log You can view detailed logs in the popup window.
    ItemExplanation
    Stop / Start DeploymentStop, Start Deployment button becomes active.
    rollbackYou can roll back to a previous version.
    History tabDeployment history is displayed.
    Pipeline Information tabThe build pipeline information associated with this VM deployment is displayed.
    logYou can view the logs of the build pipeline.
    Table. VM deployment detail screen items
    ItemExplanation
    Execution pipeline logYou can view the logs of the build pipeline.
    History logs per deployment serverYou can view the deployment agent’s logs.
    • Only displayed for AGENT type
    Table. Deployment Detail Screen Items

Delete VM deployment

Delete from list

To delete a VM deployment, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > VM Deploy menu. You will be taken to the VM Deploy page.
  3. On the VM deployment page, click the X icon of the VM deployment you want to delete from the list.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion of the VM deployment.

Delete on the detail page

To delete a VM deployment, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > VM Deploy menu. You will be taken to the VM Deploy page.
  3. On the VM deployment page, click the VM deployment you want to delete from the VM deployment list. You will be taken to the VM deployment details page.
  4. On the VM Deployment Details page, click the Delete button.
  5. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete the VM deployment deletion.

Using environment variables in VM deployment commands

You can use environment variables in the pre‑deployment command, post‑deployment command, source path of the file to be transferred, and target path of the file to be transferred.

You can use the $ placeholder or ${} placeholder within commands to access environment variables in the build pipeline.

Color mode
echo ${BUILD_NUMBER}
echo $JOB_NAME
echo ${BUILD_NUMBER}
echo $JOB_NAME
Example of using environment variables

If you want to refer to the environment variables of the VM server where the command runs, add a \.

Color mode
echo \${PATH}
echo \$LANG
echo \${PATH}
echo \$LANG
Reference example of environment variables for a VM server

Stop VM deployment

On the Deployment Details page, you can stop a VM deployment that is in progress. Clicking the Stop button in the recent deployment status area of the Deployment Details page will stop the VM deployment.

The states in which deployment can be halted are listed in the table below, and the Stop button is displayed only when in those states.

method
status value
Explanation
SSHrequestThe build pipeline is running.
AGENTrequestThe build pipeline is running.
AGENTBuild completeWhen the build pipeline is completed
  • When running the build pipeline, you must set the manual_deploy parameter value to use and execute it. If not used, it will immediately change to the ready state.
  • The Start Deployment button becomes active, and clicking it changes the state to ready.
  • In Release Management, you can change to the ready state using the VM deployment task.
AGENTReadyAfter the build pipeline completes, the AGENT is ready to perform deployment.
AGENTIn progressAGENT is currently executing a deployment.
Table. State where deployment can be paused

Understanding VM deployment status values

Deployment Details page lets you check the current status of the VM deployment.

status value
Explanation
Not executedNever run since its initial creation
requestThe build pipeline is running.
SuccessBuild/deployment succeeded
FailureFailed state during build or deployment
Table. Description of SSH deployment status values
status value
Explanation
Not executedNever executed after initial creation
requestThe build pipeline is running.
Build completeWhen the build pipeline is completed
  • When running the build pipeline, you must set the manual_deploy parameter value to use and execute it. If not used, it will immediately change to the ready state.
  • Start Deployment button becomes active, and clicking it changes to the ready state.
  • In Release Management, you can change to the ready state using the VM deployment task.
ReadyAfter the build pipeline completes, the AGENT is ready to perform deployment.
In progressAGENT is currently executing a deployment.
SuccessBuild/deployment succeeded
FailureFailed state during build or deployment
StopBuild or deployment is in a paused state
  • Pause button can be clicked to pause when it is enabled.
Table. AGENT deployment status value description

2.4.4 - Helm Install

Users can use the Helm Install menu to view and install project charts, project group charts, tenant charts, and system charts.

Getting Started with Helm Install

To begin using Helm Install, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Helm Install menu. The Helm Install page opens.
    ItemExplanation
    K8S clusterSelect the K8S cluster to be the target of the Helm install.
    The Helm chart list below shows only the Helm charts that can be installed on the selected K8S cluster.
    Chart nameDisplays the chart name.
    Chart repositoryDisplays information about the chart repository where the Helm chart files are stored.
    Table. Helm install screen items

Helm Chart Details

To view the Helm chart details, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > HelmInstall menu. The HelmInstall page opens.
  3. On the Helm Install page, select the K8S cluster you want to install. A list of Helm charts belonging to that cluster will be displayed.
  4. From the Helm chart list, click the Helm chart card you want to view in detail. The Helm chart details page opens.

Helm Chart Details

ItemExplanation
VersionIf there are multiple versions, you can select the desired version.
DownloadYou can download the Helm chart file to the user’s PC.
helm installYou can install Helm.
Table. Helm Chart Detail Screen Items

Summary tab

Displays the README.md file included in the Helm chart. You can view the information provided by the chart author.

Values.yaml tab

Displays the values.yaml file included in the Helm chart. You can view the values that can be modified in the chart before running helm install.

Details tab

Item
Explanation
Helm chart repository informationDisplays the repository where the Helm chart is stored.
Api VersionDisplays the API version of the Helm chart.
  • v1
  • v2
Support CI/CDWhen creating a build pipeline, the Deploy to K8S stage indicates whether the Helm chart type can be selected as a Helm release.
Allow new installation?
  • Y: New installation (helm install) is possible.
  • N: Currently, new installation (helm install) is not possible with the helm chart, and only the use of existing installed helm releases is allowed.
Image in the chartDisplays the image information used in the Helm chart.
Table. Detailed Information Tab View Items

Install Helm

To install Helm, follow these steps.

  1. On the Helm Install page, select the K8S cluster you want to install in the K8S cluster field. A list of Helm charts belonging to that cluster will be displayed.
  2. On the Helm Install page, click the Helm chart card you want to view in detail. The Helm Chart Details page opens.
  3. On the Helm Chart Details page, click the Helm Install button. The Helm Install page opens.
  4. On the Helm Install page, fill in each field on the screen and click the Next button. The Helm Chart Install popup opens.
  5. Helm chart installation Check the contents in the popup window and click the Run button to complete the Helm installation.
  6. When the installation is complete, the Kubernetes deployment page opens automatically.
    Item
    Explanation
    Release nameEnter the name to be used in Helm.
    It must be unique and cannot be duplicated within the namespace.
    CategoryDevelopment, Operations
    VersionSelect the version of the chart you want to install with Helm.
    K8S clusterDisplays the target K8S cluster for helm install.
    Changes are not allowed; if you wish to change, select the K8S cluster in Start Helm Install.
    NamespaceSelect the target namespace for the helm install from the list.
    Reference informationReference information provided by the selected K8S cluster.
    You can click each tab to view detailed information.
    included in the chart
    default Values.yaml
    You can edit the values.yaml file to run helm install with the desired values.
    If needed, refer to the reference information and modify values.yaml with those values.
    Table. Common Helm chart installation screen items
    Item
    Explanation
    Release nameEnter the name to be used in Helm.
    It must be unique and cannot be duplicated within the namespace.
    CategoryDevelopment, Operations
    VersionSelect the version of the chart you want to install with Helm.
    K8S clusterDisplays the target K8S cluster for helm install.
    Changes are not possible, and if you wish to change, select a K8S cluster in Start Helm Install.
    namespaceSelect the target namespace for helm install from the list.
    Reference informationThis is reference information provided by the selected K8S cluster. You can click each tab to view detailed information.
    Default Values.yaml included in the chart
    You can edit the values.yaml file and run helm install with the desired values.
    If needed, refer to the reference information and modify values.yaml with those values.
    Writing type
    • Form: Enter the items displayed on the screen. Form-type items are displayed only for Helm charts that support form input. For creating Helm charts that support form input, refer to Creating Helm Charts that Support Form Input.
    • Values.yaml: Modify the values in the same YAML editor screen as a typical Helm chart.
    Form and Values.yaml inputs can be switched, but switching will reset any previously entered content.
    Form inputThis is the screen displayed when you select Form in the creation type; review each item and enter values. After completing the input, click the Validation Check button to validate the entered values.
    Table. Helm chart installation screen items that support Form input

2.4.5 - Ingress/Service Management

Users can add and manage Ingress/Service using the DevOps Console.

Getting Started with Ingress/Service Management

To start managing Ingress/Service, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Ingress/Service Management menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Ingress/Service Management page.

Ingress management

  1. On the Ingress/Service Management page, click the Ingress tab.
  2. Select K8S cluster and namespace in the Ingress tab. The list of Ingresses belonging to the selected namespace will be displayed.

Ingress

Reference
Not all Ingresses created in the namespace are displayed; only the Ingresses created from the DevOps Console are shown.
ItemExplanation
K8S clusterSelect a K8S cluster from the list.
NamespaceSelect a namespace from the list. Ingresses created in the selected namespace will be displayed.
Ingress listDisplays the list of Ingresses.
SearchYou can search for Ingress.
AddYou can add an Ingress.
Table. Ingress management screen items

Add Ingress

To add an Ingress, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add button on the Ingress tab. The Add Ingress popup window opens.
  2. Add Ingress After entering the information in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
  3. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete adding the Ingress.
    ItemExplanation
    Ingress namePlease enter the Ingress name.
    K8S clusterSpecifies the K8S cluster where the Ingress will be created.
    NamespaceSpecifies the namespace where the Ingress will be created.
    ServiceSelect the Service that Ingress will use as a target from the list of Services.
    RulesEnter the Host, Path, and Service Port to configure in the Ingress.
    Click Add to input multiple entries.
    Table. Additional Ingress Input Items

Ingress Details

To view the detailed information of an Ingress, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Ingress you want to view in the Ingress tab. Navigate to the Ingress Details page.
  2. On the Ingress Details page, view the detailed information of the Ingress.
  3. When you click the View icon, the Ingress YAML popup window opens.
  4. Ingress YAML In the popup window, you can view the Ingress YAML content.

Edit Ingress

Caution
The Ingress used in blue/green deployments and canary cannot be modified.

To modify the Ingress, follow these steps.

  1. In the Ingress tab, click the Ingress you want to edit. You will be taken to the Ingress Details page.
  2. On the Ingress Details page, click the Edit button. The Ingress Edit popup opens.
  3. Ingress Edit In the popup window, edit the Ingress information and click the Confirm button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the Ingress modification.

Delete Ingress

Caution
Ingress used in blue/green deployments and canary cannot be deleted.

To delete an Ingress, follow these steps.

  1. In the Ingress tab, click the Ingress you want to delete. You will be taken to the Ingress Details page.
  2. On the Ingress Details page, click the Delete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the Ingress deletion.

Service Management

  1. On the Ingress/Service Management page, click the Service tab.
  2. In the Service tab, select the K8S cluster and namespace. The list of Services belonging to the selected namespace will be displayed.

Service

Reference
Not all Services created in the namespace are displayed; only the Services created from the DevOps Console are shown.
ItemExplanation
K8S clusterSelect a K8S cluster from the list.
namespaceSelect a namespace from the list. Services created in the selected namespace will be displayed.
Service ListDisplays the list of services.
searchYou can search for Service.
AddYou can add a Service.
External Endpoint information iconIf there is related additional information, display it.
Table. Service Management Screen Items

Add Service

To add a Service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add button in the Service tab. The Service Add popup opens.
  2. Add Service After entering the information in the popup window, click the Confirm button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete adding the Service.
    ItemExplanation
    Service namePlease enter the service name.
    K8S clusterDisplays the K8S cluster where the Service will be created.
    namespaceSpecifies the namespace where the Service will be created.
    typeSelect the Service type
    • ClusterIP
    • NodePort
    • LoadBalancer
    DeploymentSelect the Deployment that will be the Service’s target from the list.
    PortsEnter the Port Name, Port, Target, and Protocol that the Service will use.
    Click the Add button to input multiple entries.
    Table. Service addition input fields

Service Details

To view the Service details, follow these steps.

  1. On the Service tab, click the Service you want to view in detail. You will be taken to the Service Details page.
  2. Service Details page shows detailed information.
  3. Click the View icon to open the Service YAML popup window.
  4. Service YAML You can view the Service YAML content in the popup window.

Edit Service

Caution
The Service used in blue/green deployments cannot be modified.

To modify the Service, follow these steps.

  1. In the Service tab, click the Service you want to edit. Go to the Service Details page.
  2. On the Service Details page, click the Edit button. The Service Edit popup window opens.
  3. Service Edit In the popup window, edit the Service information and click the Confirm button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the Service edit.

Delete Service

Caution
The Service used in blue/green deployments cannot be deleted.

To delete a Service, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Service tab screen, click the Service you want to edit. You will be taken to the Service Details page.
  2. On the Service Details page, click the Delete button.
  3. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete the Service deletion.

2.4.6 - Kubernetes Secret Management

Users can view secrets created in a namespace. In addition, they can create and delete secrets.

Getting Started with Kubernetes Secret

To start managing Kubernetes Secrets, follow the steps below.

  1. Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Build/Deploy > Kubernetes Secret Management menu. You will be taken to the Kubernetes Secret Management page.
    ItemExplanation
    K8S clusterSelect a K8S cluster from the list.
    namespaceSelect a namespace from the list. Secrets created in the selected namespace will be displayed.
    Secret ListDisplays the list of secrets.
    searchYou can search for secrets.
    Detailed filterYou can perform detailed searches by using the detailed filter.
    AddYou can add a secret.
    Table. Kubernetes Secret Management Screen Items

Add secret

Note
In Kubernetes Secret management, the only secret you can add is the Docker config secret, and other secrets cannot be added on the current screen.
Docker Config Secret is a secret used to store Docker registry credentials for an image.

Follow these steps to add a Kubernetes Secret.

  1. Select K8S Cluster on the Kubernetes Secret Management page.
  2. Select namespace.
  3. Click the Add button. The Add Secret popup opens.
  4. Add Secret Enter the information in the popup window and click the Connection Test button.
  5. If Connection Test succeeds, click the Save button.
  6. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the addition.
    ItemExplanation
    K8S clusterDisplays the K8S cluster where the secret will be created.
    NamespaceSpecifies the namespace where the secret will be created.
    Image repository URLSelect the image repository to use in Secret.
    Secret nameEnter the secret name.
    Select authentication information
    • Use new credentials: Enter new credentials.
    • Use saved credentials: Choose one of the previously used credentials.
    Table. Input fields for adding a secret

View Secret Details

To view the secret details, follow these steps.

  1. Kubernetes Secret Management On the page, click the secret whose details you want to view. Secret Details popup window opens.
  2. Secret Details View the secret’s detailed information in the popup window.

Delete secret

To delete the secret, follow these steps.

  1. Kubernetes Secret Management On the page, select the checkbox of the secret you want to delete.
  2. Click the Delete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

2.4.7 - Environment Variable Management

Users can add frequently used parameters and credentials as environment variables for use when creating a build pipeline.

Getting Started with Environment Variable Management

Follow these steps to manage environment variables used in the build pipeline.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Build/Deploy > Environment Variable Management menu in the left menu of the Project Dashboard page. You will be taken to the Environment Variable Management page.

Adding environment variables

Add parameter environment variable

Parameter environment variables act as Linux Environment variables and are used in the NAME=VALUE format.

To add a parameter environment variable, follow these steps.

  1. On the Environment Variable Management page, click the Add button. The Add Environment Variable popup window opens.
  2. Add environment variable In the popup window, select the type as parameter.
  3. After entering the information, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the addition.
    ItemExplanation
    NamePlease enter the parameter name.
    valuePlease enter the parameter value.
    ExplanationEnter a description for the user to refer to.
    Table. Parameter environment variable addition input items

Add authentication credentials environment variable

The authentication environment variable stores credentials for use. You can pre-register and share credentials so they can be easily used in stages that require authentication (preventing duplicate entry).

To add authentication environment variables, follow these steps.

  1. On the Environment Variable Management page, click the Add button. The Add Environment Variable popup window opens.
  2. Add Environment Variable In the popup window, select the type as “Authentication Information”.
  3. After entering the information, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the addition.
    ItemExplanation
    NameEnter the name of the credential.
    CategorySelect a category value
    • Development: Credentials can be used only in build pipelines of type Development.
    • Production: Credentials can be used only in build pipelines of type Production.
    Authentication typePlease select an authentication type.
    IDPlease enter your ID.
    Password/Private KeyEnter the password or private key according to the authentication type.
    ExplanationEnter a description for the user to refer to.
    Table. Parameter Environment Variable Additional Input Fields

Modify environment variables

To modify environment variables, follow these steps.

  1. On the Environment Variable Management page, click the environment variable you want to edit. The Edit Environment Variable popup will open.
  2. Edit Environment Variables In the popup window, modify the desired items and click the Save button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the addition.

Delete environment variable

To delete an environment variable, follow these steps.

Delete from list

  1. On the Environment Variable Management screen, select the checkbox of the environment variable you want to delete.
  2. Click the Delete button on the Environment Variable Management screen.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

Delete in the environment variable edit popup

  1. Environment Variable Management screen, click the environment variable you want to delete. Environment Variable Edit popup window opens.
  2. Edit Environment Variable in the popup window, click the Delete button.
  3. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete the deletion.

2.5 - Project Group

2.5.1 - Project Group Overview

Users can view and modify information about project groups according to their permissions.

Project Group Overview

To view the project group overview, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project Group Management icon of the project group. You will be taken to the Project Group Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Project Group Overview menu in the left menu. The Project Group Overview screen appears.

Modify project group name

To modify the project group name, follow these steps.

  1. On the Project Group Overview screen, click the Edit Project Group Name button. The Edit Project Group Name popup opens.
  2. Project Group Name Edit In the popup window, edit the project group name and click the Save button to complete the project group name edit.

Delete project group

To delete a project group, follow these steps.

  1. On the Project Group Overview screen, click the Project Group Delete button. The Project Group Delete popup opens.
  2. Project Group Deletion In the popup window, verify the path of the Jenkins folder to be deleted, enter the project group name, and then click the Delete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion of the project group.
Caution
  • A project group cannot be deleted if it contains projects.
  • Deleted project groups cannot be restored.
  • All available Jenkins project group level folders will be deleted, so please verify.

Project group members

Getting Started with Project Group Members

To view the project group members, follow these steps.

  1. Project Group Overview screen, click the Member tab.

Add project group members

To add members to a project group, follow these steps.

  1. On the Project Group Overview screen, click the Member tab. The Project Group Member List screen appears.
  2. On the Project Group Member List screen, click the Add button. The Project Group Member Add popup opens.
  3. Add Project Group Member In the popup window, after completing the settings, click the Save button to complete adding the project group member.
    ItemExplanation
    Add memberSearch for the user you want to add as a project group member by email, then click the Add button.
    Permission SettingsSet the role to assign to the member you want to add
    • Owner
    • Master
    • Developer
    • Viewer
    Delete memberClick the X icon to remove the member from the project group.
    Table. Project Group Member Additional Items

Change the role of a project group member

To change a project group’s member role, follow these steps.

  1. On the Project Group Overview screen, click the Member tab. The Project Group Member List screen appears.
  2. Project Group Member List screen, locate the user whose role you want to change.
  3. Select the user’s project group role from the list. It is saved immediately upon selection, and the user’s project group role will be updated.

Delete project group member

To remove a member from a project group, follow these steps.

  1. On the Project Group Overview screen, click the Member tab. The Project Group Member List screen appears.
  2. Project Group Member List screen, select the checkbox of the user you want to delete.
  3. Click the Delete button at the top of the list to remove the selected user from the project group members.

Project group common settings

Getting Started with Project Group Common Settings

To view the project group common settings, follow these steps.

  1. On the Project Group Overview screen, click the Common Settings tab. The Common Settings screen appears.

Configure Messenger

If you configure the messenger, you can send event details to the messenger when an event occurs in the project group.

To set up the messenger for the project group, follow these steps.

  1. On the Project Group Overview screen, click the Common Settings tab. The Common Settings screen appears.
  2. On the Common Settings screen, click the Edit icon for Messenger Settings. The Messenger Settings popup window opens.
  3. Messenger Settings popup window, after completing the settings, click the Save button to finish the messenger settings.

Manage all project groups

Note
It displays information for all project groups that the user has permission to access. Except for Project Group Name Change, Delete Project Group, it provides the same functionality as the Project Group Overview.
  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tenant > Project Group menu. You will be taken to the Project Group page.

2.5.2 - Create Project Group

Create Project Group

To create a project group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Create Project Group button at the top of the Main page. The Create Project Group popup opens.
  2. Create Project Group After entering the fields in the popup, click the Confirm button to complete the project group creation.
    ItemExplanation
    Project group nameEnter the project group name that will be displayed on the screen.
    Project Group IDEnter the ID of the project group to be managed in DevOps Console.
    The project group ID is used in build pipelines, etc.
    tenantSelect the tenant for which the project group will be created from the list
    • Tenant Join Shortcut: If the tenant for creating the project group is not visible in the list, click the Tenant Join Shortcut link to request to join.
    Table. Project Group Creation Input Items
Note
Depending on the selected tenant, a tenant administrator’s approval process may be required.

Register Tenant

To join a tenant, follow these steps.

  1. In the Create Project Group popup, click the Tenant Join Shortcut link. The Tenant Join Request popup opens.
  2. Enter the tenant code to register in the Tenant Search field accurately and click the Search icon. The tenant information will be retrieved.
  3. Verify that the displayed tenant is correct, enter the request reason, and click the Add button. It will be added to the list below.
  4. After selecting the permissions for the tenant added to the list below, click the Save button.

2.5.3 - Project Group Dashboard

Getting Started with Project Group Dashboard

To view the project group dashboard, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project Group Management icon of the project group. You will be taken to the Project Group Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Dashboard menu in the left menu.
    ItemExplanation
    Basic InformationDisplays the basic information of the project group.
    Scale and Usage StatusDisplays the organization size, tool usage status, and build/deployment status of the project group.
    Monthly pipeline execution trendShows the monthly pipeline execution count, average execution interval, and execution time for the project group.
    Inactive pipelineShows a list of pipelines that have not been run and have no successful history, according to the reference date.
    Release Execution TrendDisplays the daily release execution count, average lead time, and average release cycle within the project group.
    Recent event historyYou can view recent events that occurred in the project group.
    Table. Project Group Dashboard Items

2.6 - Tenant

2.6.1 - Tenant Management

A tenant is a logical partition that independently provides and shares tools, apps, and templates usable in a project.

Each project belongs to a single project group, and each project group belongs to a single tenant; therefore, a project can access and utilize the tools and App templates assigned to its tenant.

Getting Started with Tenant Management

To start tenant management, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Tenant > Tenant Management menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Tenant Management page.

Tenant detail view

To view tenant details, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tenant Management page, click the tenant you want to view in detail. You will be taken to the Tenant Details page.

Managing tenant members

To manage tenant members, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tenant Details page, click the Member tab.

Add tenant member

To add a tenant member, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Member tab on the Tenant Details page.
  2. Click the Add button in the Member tab. The Add Member popup opens.
  3. Add Member In the popup window, select a member, set permissions, and click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Delete Tenant Member

To delete a tenant member, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tenant Details page, click the Member tab.
  2. In the Member tab, select the checkbox of the member you want to delete.
  3. Delete Click the button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Check tenant tool

To check the tenant tool, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tenant Details page, click the Tool tab.

Check tenant member approval history

To view the tenant member approval history, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tenant Details page, click the Approval History tab.

Manage Tenant Common Settings

To manage tenant common settings, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tenant Details page, click the Common Settings tab.
    ItemExplanation
    BillingSelect whether to charge.
    Project group creation approvalSelect whether project group creation requires approval
    • If not used, tenant members can freely create project groups.
    Delete releaseSelect whether to delete the release
    • You can set whether to delete a completed release.
    Release suspension approvalSelect whether to require approval for release suspension
    • You can configure it to submit an internal approval request to stop an ongoing release.
    Approval Task - Add JIRA FieldWhen linking a Jira project to an approval Task, add a custom field of the Jira project to be included in the approval details.
    emailEnter the email address to receive
    • You can receive inquiries related to the tenant.
    Table. Tenant Common Configuration Items

Manage tenant join requests

To manage tenant enrollment requests, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Tenant > Tenant Management menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Tenant Management page.
  3. On the Tenant Management page, click the Join Request link for the tenant. The displayed number indicates the number of join requests for the tenant.
  4. Tenant Registration Request popup window opens.
  5. Tenant Registration Request In the popup’s request list, select the requester’s checkbox to approve or reject.
  6. After entering your comment, click the Approve or Reject button.

Manage Project Group Creation Requests

To manage project group creation requests, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Tenant > Tenant Management menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Tenant Management page.
  3. On the Tenant Management page, click the Project Group Creation Request link for the tenant. The displayed number is the count of project group creation requests.
  4. Project Group Creation Request A popup window opens.
  5. Project Group Creation Request In the request list of the popup window, select the requester’s checkbox to approve or reject.
  6. After entering your comment, click the Approve or Reject button.

2.6.2 - Tenant Dashboard

Users can assess various usage metrics per system (tenant) via the dashboard.

Getting Started with the Tenant Dashboard

To view the tenant dashboard, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Management icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Tenant > Dashboard menu.
    ItemExplanation
    tenantSelect the tenant to display on the tenant dashboard.
    Download status dataYou can download the basic billing data report needed by tenant administrators.
    Scale and Usage StatusYou can view the organization size, tool usage status, and the number of builds/deployments under the tenant.
    Monthly pipeline execution trendDisplays the monthly pipeline execution count, average execution interval, and execution time for the tenant.
    Inactive pipelineShows a list of pipelines that have not been run and have no successful history, according to the reference date.
    Release execution trendYou can view the execution trend of releases under a tenant.
    Tool usage statusYou can view the usage status of each tool located under the tenant.
    Usage status refers to the number of projects, repositories, pipelines, etc., for each tool.
    App. Template usage statusApp that exists under a tenant. You can view usage per template.
    Usage status refers to the number of templates used when creating a project.
    Helm Chart Usage StatusYou can view the usage status of each Helm chart under the tenant.
    The usage status indicates the number of Helm charts used during chart installation.
    Recent event historyYou can view the recent event history that occurred in the tenant.
    Table. Tenant Dashboard Display Items

2.6.3 - Tenant Notice

Note

The tenant administrator can add, edit, and delete notices displayed to users belonging to the tenant.

Editing and deletion are allowed only for registered users.

Getting Started with Tenant Announcements

To start tenant announcements, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tenant > Tenant Announcements menu. You will be taken to the Tenant Announcements page.

Add tenant announcement

To add a tenant announcement, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tenant Notices page, click the Add button. The Add Notice popup opens.
  2. Add Notice In the popup window, specify the notice title, notice content, and target tenant, then click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Notice TitlePlease enter the notice title.
    NoticeEnter the notice body.
    You can specify tables, lists, fonts, etc.
    Popup width/heightEnter the width and height of the popup to be displayed on the screen.
    target tenantSelect the tenant(s) to which the notice will be displayed. You can specify one or more tenants.
    Only tenants where you are registered with administrator privileges will be shown.
    Notice periodDepending on the nature of the notice, the following options are available.
    • Always notice
    • Notice for a specific period only
    • No notice
    Email sending timeSelect immediate email sending, scheduled sending, or no sending according to the purpose of the notice.
    It will not be displayed if mail is not used in the system.
    Table. Additional Input Items for Tenant Announcements

Manage Tenant Announcements

Edit tenant announcement

To edit the tenant announcement, follow these steps.

  1. Tenant Notices page, click the notice. Notice Details popup window opens.
  2. Click the Edit button in the Notice Details popup window. The Notice Edit popup window opens.
  3. Edit Notice After modifying the information in the popup window, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the edit.

Delete tenant announcement

To delete a tenant announcement, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tenant Notices page, click the notice. The Notice Details popup window opens.
  2. In the Notice Details popup, click the Delete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

Tenant notice preview

To preview tenant announcements, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tenant Announcements page, click the Preview button for the announcement.
  2. The notice popup window opens at its actual display size.
  3. When the check is complete, click the Confirm button.

2.7 - Repository

2.7.1 - Code Repository

Users can view the list of code repositories, such as GitHub and GitLab, used in the project and add repositories from the project’s code repository menu.

Getting Started with Code Repository

To start a code repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Repository > Code Repository menu. You will be taken to the Code Repository page.

Add code repository

To add a code repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Code Repository page, click the Add Code Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the Add Code Repository page.
  2. On the Add Code Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Repository typeSelect the repository to use
    • Registered tools: Users can select and use the types of SCM Repository tools (Github, Gitlab, etc.) that are available.
    • Unregistered tools: You can enter the domain of a tool that is not registered. The unregistered tool entry appears only for App templates that do not include source code (Environment Only).
    New/Existing usageSelect Create new repository or Use existing repository
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • When creating a new repository, the URL is formed from the project group name/project name.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication credentials.
    Repository informationEnter repository information
    • You can use a code repository that is not registered as a tool in DevOps Console.
    • You must also go through the URL check process.
    Table. Code Repository Add Input Items

Managing code repositories

Code repository list

ItemExplanation
User permission settingsUser Permission Settings The popup window opens.
Webhook configurationWebhook Settings The popup window opens.
Edit iconThe code repository’s Edit Authentication Information popup window opens.
DeleteDelete the code repository.
When deleting, you can choose whether to also delete the code repository in SCM.
Table. Code Repository List Screen Items

Add account to code repository

To add an account to the code repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Code Repository page, click the User Permission Settings icon for the repository you want to configure. The User Permission Settings popup window will open.
  2. User Permission Settings In the popup window, enter the credentials of the account you want to add, then click the Save button to complete adding the account.

Setting up a webhook in the code repository

You can configure a webhook to trigger the pipeline when changes such as commit or push occur on a code repository branch.

To set up a webhook, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Webhook Settings icon for the code repository you want to configure on the Code Repository page. The Webhook Settings popup opens.
  2. In the Webhook Settings popup, click the Add button.
  3. Webhook Settings In the popup window, select the pipeline you want to run, enter the branch name, and click the Save button to complete the webhook configuration.

Change account in code repository

To change the account in the code repository, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Code Repository page, click the Edit icon of the code repository you want to change. The Edit Authentication Information popup will open.
  2. Edit authentication information after entering the authentication information in the popup window, click the Save button to complete the account change.

Delete code repository

To delete the code repository, follow these steps.

  1. Code Repository page, click the X icon of the code repository you want to delete. Delete Code Repository popup opens.
  2. In the Delete code repository popup, select also delete the repository in SCM and click the Confirm button to complete the code repository deletion.
Reference

Also delete the repository in SCM.

  • Selection: Both the code repository list and the actual code repository in SCM will be deleted.
  • Unselected: It is deleted only from the code repository list, while the code repository in SCM remains.

2.7.2 - Artifact Repository

Users can integrate with Nexus to create projects in Nexus and retrieve and utilize the created projects.

Getting Started with Artifact Repository

To start managing the artifact repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Repository > Artifact Repository menu in the left navigation. You will be taken to the Artifact Repository page.

Add artifact repository

To add an artifact repository, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add Artifact Repository button at the top right of the Artifact Repository page. You will be taken to the Add Artifact Repository page.
  2. On the Add Artifact Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Select whether to create a repositoryChoose whether to create a new repository or use an existing one.
    Enter basic informationBase URL, select repository type and enter repository/authentication information.
    Table. Input fields for adding an artifact repository

Managing the artifact repository

Artifact storage list

ItemExplanation
Account ChangeModify the artifact repository credentials.
DeleteDelete the artifact repository.
Table. Artifact Repository List Screen Items

Changing the artifact repository account

To change the account in the artifact repository, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Artifact Repository page, click the Edit icon of the artifact repository you want to modify. The Edit Authentication Information popup will open.
  2. Edit authentication information after entering authentication information in the popup window, click the Save button to complete the account change.

Delete Artifact Repository

To delete the artifact repository, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Artifact Repository page, click the X icon of the repository you want to delete. Artifact Repository Deletion popup opens.
  2. In the Delete Artifact Repository popup, select also delete the repository in Nexus and click the Confirm button to complete the artifact repository deletion.
Note

Delete the repository in Nexus as well.

  • Selection: Both the artifact repository list and the Nexus repository will be deleted.
  • Unselected: It is only removed from the artifact repository list, and the repository in Nexus remains.

2.7.3 - Image Repository

Users can manage the image repositories used in a project from the project’s image repository menu.

Getting Started with Image Repository

To start managing the image repository, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Repository > Image Repository menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the Image Repository page.

Add Image Repository

To add an image repository, follow these steps.

App. Add image repository

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the App. Add Image Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the App. Add Image Repository page.
  2. App. Add Image Repository page, enter and configure each item.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Select repository typeSelect the image repository type.
    To use an image repository not registered in the Devops Console, select the Image Registry type.
    Choose whether to create a repositoryChoose whether to create a new repository or use an existing one.
    • If you selected the Docker hub or Image Registry type earlier, you can only select Use existing repository.
    Registered toolEnter repository information.
    Unregistered toolEnter repository information
    • You can register an image repository that is not registered with the DevOps Console tool.
    • Click the URL Check button to proceed with the verification process.
    • Only Use existing repository can be selected.
    Table. App. Add Image Repository Input Fields

Add pull-only image repository

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the Add Pull-Only Image Repository button in the upper right. You will be taken to the Add Pull-Only Image Repository page.
  2. Add Pull‑only Image Repository On the page, enter and configure each field.
  3. Connection Test Click the button.
  4. Click the Save button.

Manage Image Repository

Image repository list

ItemExplanation
Account ChangeThe Edit Authentication Information popup window of the image repository opens.
DeleteImage Repository Deletion a popup window opens
Table. Image Repository List Screen Items

Change Image Repository Account

To change the account in the image repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the Edit icon of the image repository you want to change. The Edit Authentication Information popup window will open.
  2. Edit authentication information after entering authentication information in the popup window, click the Save button to complete the account change.

Delete Image Repository

To delete the image repository, follow these steps.

  1. On the Image Repository page, click the X icon of the image repository you want to delete. The Delete Image Repository popup window opens.
  2. Delete Image Repository in the popup window, select also delete the Repository in IR, then click the Confirm button to complete the image repository deletion.
Reference

Delete the Repository in IR as well

  • Selection: The image repository list and the actual image repository’s repository will both be deleted.
  • Unselected: It is deleted only from the image repository list, while the actual repository in the image registry remains.

2.7.4 - Chart Repository

Users can upload and delete Helm-created charts to the chart repository.

Charts uploaded to the chart repository are used in Add Helm Chart and are utilized during helm install or when creating a project.

Getting Started with Chart Repository

To begin managing the chart repository, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Chart Repository menu. The Chart Repository screen appears.

Getting Started with Project Chart Repository

Note
You can upload, edit, or delete charts that are usable only within the project in the chart repository.
  1. Click the Project card on the Main page. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Repository > Chart Repository menu. You will be taken to the Chart Repository page.

Upload Chart

Reference
For detailed information about Chart.yaml, refer to the Helm official page.

Registration information is automatically generated based on the name and version of the uploaded chart’s Chart.yaml file.

To upload a chart to the chart repository, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. Navigate to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Chart Repository menu. The Chart Repository screen appears.
  3. On the Chart Repository page, click the Upload button. The Chart File Upload popup window opens.
  4. Chart File Upload In the popup window, after entering the content, click the Upload button.
    ItemExplanation
    Chart typePlease select a chart type.
    Tenant / Project GroupSelect the tenant/project group where the chart will be used.
    Chart fileClick the Browse button to upload the chart file.
    • Only .tgz files generated with the helm package command can be uploaded.
    Table. Chart Upload Input Items

Delete chart

To delete the chart, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Chart Repository menu. The Chart Repository screen appears.
  3. Select the checkbox of the item you want to delete from the Chart Repository list and click the Delete button.
  4. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup.
Caution
The chart cannot be deleted when it is registered in the Helm chart. Please first remove the information from the Helm chart menu.

Delete only a specific version of a chart

To delete only a specific version from the chart, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Chart Repository menu. The Chart Repository screen appears.
  3. Chart Repository Click the item you want to delete from the list. You will be taken to the Chart Version List page.
  4. On the Chart version list page, select the checkbox for the items you want to delete and click the Delete button.
  5. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup.

2.7.5 - Helm Chart

Helm chart is a feature that registers charts stored in the chart repository so they can be used in the DevOps Console.

Helm charts can be used through Helm install. Additionally, you can integrate them with the App template via Add supported Helm chart.

Getting Started with Helm Chart

To start managing Helm charts, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. Admin page opens.
  2. In the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Helm Chart menu.

Getting Started with Project Helm Chart

Note
You can register, modify, or delete Helm charts that are usable only within the project.
  1. On the Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Repository > Helm Chart menu in the left sidebar. You will be taken to the Helm Chart page.

Add Helm chart

Users can add their own Helm charts.

Before registering a Helm chart, the user must first upload the chart to be used via Upload Chart.

To add a Helm chart, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. The Admin page opens.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Helm Chart menu. The Helm Chart page opens.
  3. Select the Helm chart type from the menu. The Add Helm chart button appears only if you have registration permission based on the selected information.
  4. Click the Add Helm Chart button. You will be taken to the Helm Chart Registration page.
  5. Enter Helm chart basic information and click the Start button.
    ItemExplanation
    Helm chart typeSelect the type of Helm chart to add.
    Tenant/Project GroupSelect the tenant/project group to add the Helm chart
    • When selecting a tenant, you can use the registered chart only in projects of the selected tenant.
    • When selecting a project group, you can use the registered chart only in projects of the selected project group.
    Allow new installationSelect whether to allow a new installation via Helm install.
    Table. Helm Chart Basic Information Settings
  6. After selecting Helm chart repository and Helm chart, click the Validation Check button.
  7. After entering the remaining information, click the Next button.
    repository
    Item
    Explanation
    ChartMuseumHelm chart repositorySelect the chart repository as ChartMuseum.
    Select chartSelect the chart you want to register as a Helm chart among the charts registered via 차트 업로드하기.
    Harbor OCIHelm chart repositorySelect the chart repository as Harbor OCI.
    Authentication informationEnter the chart repository credentials and click the Connection Test button.
    Chart selectionSelect a Helm chart that can be queried with the entered credentials and click the Validation Check button.
    OCIHelm chart repositorySelect the chart repository as OCI.
    Authentication informationEnter the chart repository credentials and click the Connection Test button.
    Chart inputEnter the Helm chart that can be queried using the authentication information entered in Authentication Information, and click the Validation Check button.
    (ex. oci://chart.url/repo/chartname:version)
    commoniconSelect an icon to represent the Helm chart.
    CI/CD informationSelect whether to support CI/CD functionality
    • Indicates whether it is linked with the App template.
    • The chart’s Values.yaml file must contain the keys image.repository, image.tag, and imagePullSecrest[0].name.
    • Support CI/CDWhen selected, a CI/CD information step is added.
    Chart imageSelect whether to register an image
    • The chart’s Values.yaml file must contain the key imagePullSecrets[0].name.
    • No image If selected, the image secret information step will be omitted.
    Table. Chart Repository Configuration Items
  8. After selecting the image repository and entering the authentication information, click the Connection Test button.
  9. After entering the remaining information, click the Next button.
    ItemExplanation
    Image repository informationSelect an image repository and enter the authentication information.
    • The image repository requires administrator privileges.
    • Grant read access to the image repository for users who want to perform a Helm install using a Helm chart.
    • Assign permissions to the image repository using the entered authentication information.
    Add used imagesAdd the image path of the selected image repository.
    • Select an image from the list: choose Organization, Repository, and Tag to add.
    • User input: directly enter the image’s docker repository and docker tag to add.
    • Multiple entries are allowed.
    Use the registrant’s authentication credentialsThis is an option that can be selected when the image repository chosen in the image registry is a tool that cannot grant permissions (e.g., SCR).
    • If not checked, when the Helm chart user performs an installation, the Pull permission for the image used by the Helm chart user is added. If the tool cannot grant permissions, no permission granting is performed.
    • If not checked, when the Helm chart user performs an installation, the Helm chart registrant’s credentials are used instead of the Helm chart user’s permissions.
    Cautions when checked
    • Since the registrant’s credentials may be exposed to the Helm chart user, it should be used only when necessary.
    • If the image repository provides only image Pull, it must be selected to avoid issues during use. You must enter an image repository that will be used exclusively for Pull. (When checked, Pull and Push cannot be performed simultaneously on a single image repository.)
    • The registrant’s credentials are used in Project > Image Repository > Pull-only images and the Helm release’s ImagePull Secret. These credentials cannot be changed by Helm chart users, and if the registrant’s credentials are changed in the Helm chart, they are updated globally.
    Select Docker base imageSelect the image to be used as the Docker base image
    • Only select this if you chose Support CI/CD in the previous step, and it will be used as the base image for Docker build.
    Table. Image secret information configuration items
  10. App to support. After selecting a template, click the Done button.
Reference
App marked as Environment Only. The template provides only the build/deployment environment without project sample source code.

Modify Helm chart

To modify the Helm chart, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. Admin page opens.
  2. Click the Tools & Templates > Helm Chart menu in the left menu.
  3. Click the Helm chart card you want to edit from the Helm chart list. The Helm chart details page opens.
  4. Click the Edit button at the bottom right.
  5. After editing the information, click the Save button to complete the edit.

Add Helm chart version

To add a Helm chart version, the same chart with only a different version must already be registered via Upload Chart.

To add a version to the Helm chart, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. The Admin page opens.
  2. In the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Helm Chart menu.
  3. Click the Helm chart card you want to edit from the Helm chart list. The Helm chart details page opens.
  4. Click the Add Version button at the bottom right. The Add Helm Chart Version popup window opens.
  5. After entering the information, click the Save button to complete adding the version.
    ItemExplanation
    Chart versionSelect the chart version to add
    • Shows the versions of charts in the chart repository that are not registered as Helm charts.
    Table. Additional Helm Chart Version Settings

Delete Helm chart

To delete a Helm chart, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. The Admin page opens.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Helm Chart menu. The Helm Chart page opens.
  3. Click the Helm chart card you want to delete from the Helm chart list. The Helm chart details page opens.
  4. Click the Delete button at the bottom right.
  5. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

2.7.5.1 - Creating Helm Charts with Form Input Support

Users can create a Helm chart that supports Form input.

Reference
Only available in versions Helm 3 or higher.

Helm chart that supports Form input

When you use a Helm chart that supports Form input and run helm install, a user UI is provided that allows you to enter each field.

Helm chart file structure and values.schema.json file

Helm chart file structure

To support Form input, an additional values.schema.json file is required in the basic Helm chart file structure.

Helm chart directory structure
Figure. Helm chart directory structure

The relationship between values.schema.json and values.yaml files

Relationship between values.schema.json and values.yaml files
Figure. Relationship between values.schema.json and values.yaml files

values.schema.json

  • This file defines a JSON Schema to validate the values entered in the values.yaml file.
  • In the DevOps Console, in addition to the JSON Schema functionality, we added a feature that displays a form on the screen so that users can easily input data.

JSON Schema Basics

The values.schema.json file used in DevOps Console supports the standard format defined by JSON Schema.

Reference

For detailed guidance on the standard format, refer to the site below.

The description of the basic attributes is as follows.

attributeDescriptionData typeAllowed value
$schemastringhttp://json-schema.org/schema#
typeData type
  • The default rendering form is determined by the data type
string
  • string
    • Create an input field that receives a string
    • Render a combobox when oneOf or enum is present
    • Render an input password when render is password
  • number
    • Create an input field that receives integers and real numbers
  • integer
    • Create an input field that receives an integer
  • object
    • define a form group with properties
    • used for hierarchical structure processing
  • array
    • Rendering a list of input fields that can accept multiple data entries
  • boolean
    • checkbox rendering
  • null
titleLabelstringItem label definition
descriptiondescriptionstringDisplayed as a tooltip
readOnlyread-only statusboolean
  • default: false
  • The generated form is displayed as read-only
requiredList of required input itemsarraye.g, "required": ["username", "password"]
Table. JSON Schema property items

Items defined in the DevOps Console

The following items are defined in the DevOps Console and operate only within the DevOps Console.

attributeDescriptionData typeAllowed value
formDevOps Console screen display option
  • Only when set to true, it is displayed on the screen as a Form
booleandefault: false
renderChange rendererstring
  • password: Used when special handling (masking) such as passwords is required in a Form
formatstring format reference referencestring
  • ip, hostname, uri, etc.: you can input formats provided by default in JSON Schema
  • password_confirm: create an input field for password confirmation
form_localeDefine for internationalization processing
  • If no locale is set, use the default property values
  • Korean (ko)/English (en) support
object
  • ko
    • label
    • description
  • en
    • label
    • description
Table. Items defined in DevOps Console

hierarchical processing

To handle hierarchical structures, JSON Schema can define a "type": "object" property value and a properties attribute.
For child properties, define them under the properties item.

Below is an example that defines the service.internalPort property.

Color mode
"service": {
    "type": "object",
    "form": true,
    "properties": {
        "internalPort": {
            "type": "number",
            "title": "Container Port",
            "description": "HTTP port to expose at container level",
            "form": true
        }
<중략>
"service": {
    "type": "object",
    "form": true,
    "properties": {
        "internalPort": {
            "type": "number",
            "title": "Container Port",
            "description": "HTTP port to expose at container level",
            "form": true
        }
<중략>
Hierarchical processing example

Internationalization handling

For internationalization processing, use the form_locale attribute and define it as follows.

Korean and English are supported.

Color mode
"db": {
  "type": "string",
  "title": "DB",
  "description": "choose db type",
  "oneOf": [
    {
      "const": "in",
      "title": "internal"
    },
    {
      "const": "ex",
      "title": "external"
    }
  ],
  "form": true,
  "form_locale": {
    "ko": {
      "label": "Database",
      "description": "Select the database type"
      "internal": "internal"
      "external": "external"
    },
    "en": {
      "label": "Database"
    }
  }
}
"db": {
  "type": "string",
  "title": "DB",
  "description": "choose db type",
  "oneOf": [
    {
      "const": "in",
      "title": "internal"
    },
    {
      "const": "ex",
      "title": "external"
    }
  ],
  "form": true,
  "form_locale": {
    "ko": {
      "label": "Database",
      "description": "Select the database type"
      "internal": "internal"
      "external": "external"
    },
    "en": {
      "label": "Database"
    }
  }
}
Example of Internationalization Handling

values.schema.json example

Examples by Form Type

Input

To display the fields defined in the values.schema.json file as a form on the screen, you must set the form field’s value to true.

Color mode
{
  "$schema": "http://json-schema.org/schema#",
  "type": "object",
  "properties": {
    "form_field": {
      "type": "string", <--- create an input field that receives a string
      "form": true <----- displayed on screen when true
    },
    "hide_field": {  <-- not displayed
      "type": "string"
    }
  }
}
{
  "$schema": "http://json-schema.org/schema#",
  "type": "object",
  "properties": {
    "form_field": {
      "type": "string", <--- create an input field that receives a string
      "form": true <----- displayed on screen when true
    },
    "hide_field": {  <-- not displayed
      "type": "string"
    }
  }
}
Input processing example

Password

Color mode
{
  "$schema": "http://json-schema.org/schema#",
  "type": "object",
  "properties": {
    "password_field": {
      "type": "string",
      "form": true,
      "render": "password", <---- displayed as password
      "format": "password_confirm" <--- when adding a password confirmation input field
    }
  }
}
{
  "$schema": "http://json-schema.org/schema#",
  "type": "object",
  "properties": {
    "password_field": {
      "type": "string",
      "form": true,
      "render": "password", <---- displayed as password
      "format": "password_confirm" <--- when adding a password confirmation input field
    }
  }
}
Password processing example

Checkbox

Color mode
"enabled": {
  "title": "enable persistence",
  "type": "boolean",
  "form": true
}
"enabled": {
  "title": "enable persistence",
  "type": "boolean",
  "form": true
}
Checkbox handling example

To display a dropdown field on the screen and specify allowed values, you can use the enum and oneOf properties.

enum

Use when the text displayed on the screen matches the stored value.

Color mode
"postgres": {
  "type": "string",
  "title": "Postgres",
  "description": "choose PostgreSQL type.",
  "enum": [
    "internal",
    "external",
    "both"
  ],
  "form": true
}
"postgres": {
  "type": "string",
  "title": "Postgres",
  "description": "choose PostgreSQL type.",
  "enum": [
    "internal",
    "external",
    "both"
  ],
  "form": true
}
Enum handling example

oneOf

Use this when the displayed text on the screen and the stored value need to be different.

Color mode
"Oneof": {
  "type": "string",
  "title": "DB",
  "description": "choose db type",
  "oneOf": [
    {
      "const": "in",  <-- value saved to the yaml file when selected
      "title": "internal" <-- value displayed in the dropdown form
    },
    {
      "const": "ex",
      "title": "external"
    }
  ],
  "form": true
}
"Oneof": {
  "type": "string",
  "title": "DB",
  "description": "choose db type",
  "oneOf": [
    {
      "const": "in",  <-- value saved to the yaml file when selected
      "title": "internal" <-- value displayed in the dropdown form
    },
    {
      "const": "ex",
      "title": "external"
    }
  ],
  "form": true
}
Example of oneOf handling

Array

Color mode
"Array": {
  "type": "array",
  "items": {
    "type": "string",
    "form": true
  },
  "form": true
}
"Array": {
  "type": "array",
  "items": {
    "type": "string",
    "form": true
  },
  "form": true
}
Array processing example

Object Array

Color mode
"objectArray": {
  "type": "array",
  "title": "Object Array",
  "form": true,
  "items": {
    "type": "object",
    "form": true,
    "properties": {
      "host": {
        "type": "string",
        "form": true
      },
      "path": {
        "type": "string",
        "form": true
      }
    }
  }
}
"objectArray": {
  "type": "array",
  "title": "Object Array",
  "form": true,
  "items": {
    "type": "object",
    "form": true,
    "properties": {
      "host": {
        "type": "string",
        "form": true
      },
      "path": {
        "type": "string",
        "form": true
      }
    }
  }
}
Object Array processing example

values.schema.json full file creation example

system-nginx

Color mode
{
    "$schema": "http://json-schema.org/schema#",
    "type": "object",
    "form": true,
    "properties": {
        "service": {
            "type": "object",
            "form": true,
            "properties": {
                "type": {
                    "type": "string",
                    "title": "Service Type",
                    "form": true,
                    "enum": ["ClusterIP", "NodePort", "LoadBalancer", "ExternalName"]
                },
                "externalPort": {
                    "type": "number",
                    "title": "Service Port",
                    "description": "HTTP port to expose at service level",
                    "form": true
                },
                "internalPort": {
                    "type": "number",
                    "title": "Container Port",
                    "description": "HTTP port to expose at container level",
                    "form": true
                }
            },
            "required": ["type", "externalPort", "internalPort"]
        },
        "ingress": {
            "type": "object",
            "form": true,
            "properties": {
                "enabled": {
                    "type": "boolean",
                    "title": "Use Ingress",
                    "form": true
                },
                "domain": {
                    "type": ["string", "null"],
                    "format": "hostname",
                    "title": "Ingress Domain",
                    "description": "Default host for the ingress resource (required when `ingress.enabled=true`)",
                    "form": true
                }
            }
        },
        "networkPolicy": {
            "type": "object",
            "form": true,
            "properties": {
                "enabled": {
                    "type": "boolean",
                    "title": "Use NetworkPolicy",
                    "form": true
                }
            }
        }
    }
}
{
    "$schema": "http://json-schema.org/schema#",
    "type": "object",
    "form": true,
    "properties": {
        "service": {
            "type": "object",
            "form": true,
            "properties": {
                "type": {
                    "type": "string",
                    "title": "Service Type",
                    "form": true,
                    "enum": ["ClusterIP", "NodePort", "LoadBalancer", "ExternalName"]
                },
                "externalPort": {
                    "type": "number",
                    "title": "Service Port",
                    "description": "HTTP port to expose at service level",
                    "form": true
                },
                "internalPort": {
                    "type": "number",
                    "title": "Container Port",
                    "description": "HTTP port to expose at container level",
                    "form": true
                }
            },
            "required": ["type", "externalPort", "internalPort"]
        },
        "ingress": {
            "type": "object",
            "form": true,
            "properties": {
                "enabled": {
                    "type": "boolean",
                    "title": "Use Ingress",
                    "form": true
                },
                "domain": {
                    "type": ["string", "null"],
                    "format": "hostname",
                    "title": "Ingress Domain",
                    "description": "Default host for the ingress resource (required when `ingress.enabled=true`)",
                    "form": true
                }
            }
        },
        "networkPolicy": {
            "type": "object",
            "form": true,
            "properties": {
                "enabled": {
                    "type": "boolean",
                    "title": "Use NetworkPolicy",
                    "form": true
                }
            }
        }
    }
}
Complete values.schema.json file example

2.8 - Quality

2.8.1 - Code Quality

Users can create a project in SonarQube by integrating with SonarQube, and utilize the created project in the DevOps Console.

Getting Started with Code Quality

To start code quality management, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Project card. You will be taken to the Project Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Quality > Code Quality menu. You will be taken to the Code Quality page.

Add Code Quality Project

To add a code quality project, follow these steps.

  1. On the Code Quality page, click the Add Code Quality Project button. You will be taken to the Add Project page.
  2. Add Code Quality Project On the page, enter and configure each item.
  3. After clicking the Connection Test button, click the Save button.
  4. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete adding the code quality project.
    ItemExplanation
    Select repository creation optionChoose whether to create a new repository or use an existing one
    • 툴 추가하기 If you select new creation allowed as No in [툴 추가하기], you cannot create a repository.
    Base URLSelect the code quality server to use.
    Project namePlease enter the project name to use.
    project keyEnter the project key to use.
    Authentication informationChoose whether to create a new user profile or use an existing one, then enter the username and password.
    Table. Add code quality project

Managing code quality projects

Code Quality Project List

Users can change or delete accounts in the Code Quality project.

ItemExplanation
Account changeEdit Code Quality Certification Information The popup window opens.
DeleteCode Quality Project Deletion the popup window opens.
Table. Code Quality Project List Items

Change account in the code quality project

To change the account in the Code Quality project, follow these steps.

  1. On the Code Quality page, click the Edit icon. The Edit Authentication Information popup opens.
  2. In the Edit Authentication Information popup, after entering the authentication information, click the Save button to complete the account change.

Delete Code Quality Project

To delete the code quality project, follow these steps.

  1. Code Quality page, click the X icon on the Code Quality Project card you want to delete. The Delete Code Quality Project popup will open.
  2. Delete Code Quality Project popup, select also delete the project in SonarQube and click the Confirm button.
Reference

Also delete the project in SonarQube

  • Selection: The project is actually deleted in SonarQube.
  • Unselected: Code Quality is removed only from the list and remains in SonarQube.

2.9 - Tools & Templates

2.9.1 - Tool Management

Tools refer to applications that interact with the DevOps Console to support CI/CD functionality.

Please refer to Tool Classification for the list of tools supported by DevOps Console.

Getting Started with Tool Management

To begin tool management, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Management icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > Tools menu. You will be taken to the Tools page.

Tool type

Each tool’s applicable domain varies according to its type.

Tool typedescription
System Tool
  • Available across the DevOps Console globally.
  • Only system administrators can manage it.
  • Tenant administrators can only disable it when it is enabled for their own tenant.
Tenant Tool
  • Available for use in a specific tenant.
  • You can map multiple tenants and clusters for use.
  • When registering a tool, only the tenant administrator of the initially registered tenant can manage it.
  • Tenants added later can only be used.
ProjectGroup Tool
  • Available for use in a specific project group.
  • Maps multiple project groups for use.
  • The owner of the project group can manage it.
Table. Tool Type

Tool classification

The list of tools currently supported by the DevOps Console is as follows.

Tool classificationtool
CICD PipelineJenkins
SCM RepositoryGitLab, GitHub, Git-based SCM
Image RegistryHarbor, Docker Hub, SCP Container Registry, Docker Image Registry
Code QualitySonarQube
Artifact RepositoryNexus, Object Storage (S3 compatible)
Helm Chart RepositoryHarbor
Project Management SoftwareJIRA
Table. Tool Classification
Note
  • Supported tools may change (be added or removed) according to the release schedule.
  • You can receive technical support for installing CI/CD tools through the Marketplace service of Samsung Cloud Platform. (Provided by eScore, and the supported tools can be checked in the Marketplace service)

Admin

Indicates the selected tenant or project group when adding a tool with the tenant/project group type.
Distinguish the types of management affiliation using the following icons.

  • The management belongs to the tenant.
  • The management affiliation is the project group.

Add tool

To add a tool, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool page, click the Add button. The Add Tool popup appears.

Select tool support type

  1. Add Tool Select the tool’s supported type in the popup window.
  2. Complete the selection and click the Next button. The Basic Information input screen appears.
    ItemExplanation
    typeSelect the tool’s supported type
    Tenant/Project GroupSelect which tenant/project group to map to.
    Table. Supported type selection items when adding a tool

Enter basic information

  1. Add Tool In the Basic Information input screen of the popup, select the tool category and the tool. The input screen changes based on the selected tool.
  2. After entering the required information, click the Connection Test button.
  3. Click the Next button.

SCM Repository

Itemdescription
Tool nameEnter the tool name for user identification.
Tool classificationPlease select a tool category.
toolPlease select a tool.
URLEnter the URL address to access the tool
  • Duplicate URLs cannot be registered.
URL for APIGithub.com Please enter the API path.
Whether Org creation is possibleChoose whether to enable the creation of a new Github Organization in this tenant/project group.
Whether new creation is possibleSelect whether to allow creating new repositories in this tenant/project group.
IDP usageSelect whether to use IDP.
User account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool user.
Administrator account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool administrator.
Administrator IDPlease enter the tool administrator’s ID.
Administrator password / tokenEnter the tool administrator’s password or token.
Table. SCM Repository Input Items

CICD Pipeline

ItemExplanation
Tool nameEnter the tool name for user identification.
Tool classificationPlease select a tool category.
toolPlease select a tool.
URLEnter the URL address to access the tool
  • Duplicate URLs cannot be registered.
Mail ServiceChoose whether to use the email sending feature.
CategorySelect whether to use this tool for development or operation.
IPEnter IP list
IP rangeEnter IP range
IDP usageSelect whether to use IDP.
IDP typeWhen using IDP, select the IDP type (CMP IDP, other IDP).
User account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool user.
Administrator account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool administrator.
Admin IDPlease enter the tool administrator’s ID.
Administrator password / tokenEnter the tool administrator’s password or token.
Table. CICD Pipeline input items
Warning

If the Number of executors field of the Built-In Node in Jenkins system settings is set to 1 or higher, a security issue may arise, so the tool cannot be added.

Image Registry

Itemdescription
Tool nameEnter the tool name for user identification.
Tool classificationPlease select a tool category.
toolPlease select a tool.
Whether new creation is possibleSelect whether to allow creating new repositories in this tenant/project group.
URLEnter the URL address to access the tool
  • Duplicate URLs cannot be registered.
URL for APIEnter the Docker Hub API path.
Image repository URLEnter the URL for using Docker Registry.
Use private SSL certificateSelect whether to use a private SSL.
Include system common imageSelect whether to include the system-wide image.
IDP usageSelect whether to use IDP.
User account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool user.
Administrator account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool administrator.
Administrator IDEnter the tool administrator’s ID.
Administrator password / tokenEnter the tool administrator’s password or token.
Table. Image Registry Input Items

Code Quality

ItemExplanation
Tool nameEnter the tool name for user identification.
Tool classificationPlease select a tool category.
toolPlease select a tool.
Whether new creation is possibleSelect whether to enable creation of new SonarQube projects in this tenant/project group.
URLEnter the URL address to access the tool
  • Duplicate URLs cannot be registered.
Tool versionEnter the version of SonarQube.
IDP usageSelect whether to use IDP.
User account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool user.
Administrator account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool administrator.
Administrator IDEnter the tool administrator’s ID.
Administrator password / tokenEnter the tool administrator’s password or token.
Table. Code Quality Input Items

Artifact Repository

ItemExplanation
Tool nameEnter the tool name for user identification.
Tool classificationPlease select a tool category.
toolPlease select a tool.
Whether new creation is possibleSelect whether to enable creation of a new Nexus repository in this tenant/project group.
URLEnter the URL address to access the tool
  • Duplicate URLs cannot be registered.
IDP usageSelect whether to use IDP.
User account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool user.
Administrator account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool administrator.
Administrator IDPlease enter the tool administrator’s ID.
Administrator password / tokenEnter the tool administrator’s password or token.
Table. Artifact Repository Input Items

Helm Chart Repository

Itemdescription
Tool nameEnter the tool name for user identification.
Tool classificationPlease select a tool category.
toolPlease select a tool.
Whether new creation is possibleSelect whether to allow creating new repositories in this tenant/project group.
URLEnter the URL address to access the tool
  • Duplicate URLs cannot be registered.
Use private SSL certificateSelect whether to use a private SSL.
Helm chart repository URLEnter the repository URL for the tool
  • Duplicate URLs cannot be registered.
IDP usageSelect whether to use IDP.
User account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool user.
Administrator account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool administrator.
Administrator IDPlease enter the tool administrator’s ID.
Administrator password / tokenEnter the tool administrator’s password or token.
Table. Helm Chart Repository Input Items

Project Management Software

Itemdescription
Tool nameEnter the tool name for user identification.
Tool classificationPlease select a tool category.
toolPlease select a tool.
Whether new creation is possibleChoose whether to allow creation of new JIRA projects in this tenant/project group.
URLEnter the URL address to access the tool
  • Duplicate URLs cannot be registered.
IDP usageSelect whether to use IDP.
User account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool user.
Administrator account authentication typeSelect the authentication type for the tool administrator.
Administrator IDPlease enter the tool administrator’s ID.
Administrator password / tokenEnter the tool administrator’s password or token.
Table. Project Management Software Input Items

Enter additional information

  1. Tool addition In the popup window’s Basic Information input screen, when you click the Next button, the Additional Information input screen appears.
  2. Select each item and click the Complete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete adding the tool.
    Itemdescription
    Use statusSelect whether to use the tool in this tenant/project group.
    Whether new creation is possibleSelect whether to allow creating a new repository in the given tenant/project group.
    • It is displayed only when the tool category is SCM Repository.
    Table. Additional Information Input Items

Tool Details

To begin managing the tool’s detailed information, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool page, click the tool for which you want to manage detailed information. You will be taken to the Tool Details page.

Manage tool basic information

To check the tool’s basic information, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Basic Information tab.

To modify the tool’s basic information, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Basic Information tab.
  2. Click the Edit button.
  3. After editing the required information, click the Save button.

Managing Global Tools

Reference
Only when the tool is Jenkins, the global tool tab is displayed.

Jenkins web interface’s Jenkins Management > Global Tool Configuration menu can be operated from the DevOps Console.
Only one-way registration to Jenkins is supported from the DevOps Console. (In other words, changes made by the user in the DevOps Console will overwrite the information in Jenkins.)
Users can manage the list of tools available in Jenkins, and tools registered in Global Tools are used in Tools when configuring a stage.

To manage the global tool, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Global Tool tab.

Add global tool

To add a global tool, follow these steps.

  1. In the Global Tool tab, click the Edit icon of the item you want to add. The Global Tool Management popup opens.
    • Essential tool is automatically configured in the DevOps Console.
    • essential tool cannot be deleted, and only the home path can be modified.
  2. Click the Add button. A new row will be added at the bottom of the list.
  3. Enter the information in the newly added row and click the Save button.
  4. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete.
    Itemdescription
    Tool typesThe tool type is set automatically.
    NamePlease enter the tool name.
    Home pathEnter the path where the tool is installed.
    Table. Global Tool Additional Input Items

Modify Global Tool

To modify the global tool, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Edit icon of the item you want to add in the Global Tool tab. The Global Tool Management popup opens.
  2. After editing the content, click the Save button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Delete Global Tool

To delete the global tool, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Edit icon of the item you want to add in the Global Tool tab. The Global Tool Management popup window opens.
  2. After deleting the list, click the Save button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Managing agents (kubernetes)

Note
Only when the tool is Jenkins, the Agent (kubernetes) tab is displayed.

Users can manage the agents (slave) used for builds in Jenkins.

Jenkins web screen’s 1) Jenkins Management > System Configuration > Cloud > Pod Templates or 2) Jenkins Management > Node Management > Configure Clouds > Pod Templates menu is a feature that can be operated from the DevOps Console.

DevOps Console only supports one-way registration to Jenkins. (In other words, changes made by the user in DevOps Console will overwrite the information in Jenkins.)

To manage the agent (Kubernetes), follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (Kubernetes) tab.
  2. Click the information icon in the Pod Template Management list. The Pod Template Usage Guide popup opens.

Adding Container Resource Types

Notice

If the user modifies the container resource type, it affects the Pod Template.

  • If you change the container resource type from unusedused, the number of Pod Templates will increase by (container resource type number X Pod Template number).
  • If you change the container resource type from usedunused, the expanded Pod Template will shrink back to its original number.
  • The agent names, labels, and other attributes of the expanding Pod Templates are automatically generated by combining the Resource Type entry entered by the user when registering the container resource type, to avoid duplication.

To add a container resource type, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (Kubernetes) tab.
  2. Click the Edit icon of Container Resource Type Management. The Container Resource Type Management popup window opens.
  3. Click the Add button, enter the content, and then click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.
    Itemdescription
    Whether to useSet the usage.
    • To change the usage, there must be no build pipeline configured using the Jenkins tool.
    Resource TypePlease enter the resource name.
    CPU/Memory (Request)When configuring the Kubernetes Pod Agent, enter the requested resource values to be used.
    CPU/Memory (Limit)Enter the limit values for the resources to be used when configuring the Kubernetes Pod Agent.
    Table. Container Resource Type Additional Input Items

Modify container resource type

To modify the container resource type, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (Kubernetes) tab.
  2. Click the Edit icon of Container Resource Type Management. The Container Resource Type Management popup opens.
  3. After editing the content, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Delete Container Resource Type

To delete a container resource type, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (Kubernetes) tab.
  2. Click the Edit icon of Container Resource Type Management. The Container Resource Type Management popup opens.
  3. After deleting the content, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Add Pod Template

To add a Pod Template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (Kubernetes) tab.
  2. Pod Template Management Click the Add button in the list. The Add Agent (Kubernetes) screen appears.
  3. After entering the content, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.
    Itemdescription
    Target KubernetesSelect the target Kubernetes to which the Pod Template will be added
    • Displays the list of Kubernetes clusters registered in Jenkins.
    Agent nameEnter the name of the Pod Template.
    LabelEnter the Label value to invoke the agent in the Jenkins Pipeline Script.
    Inherited Pod TemplateSelect the Pod Template that inherits configuration values (environment variables, Volume…)
    • Shows the list of Pod Templates registered in the actual Jenkins.
    containerEnter the name, Docker image, working directory, command, and argument values that map to the Container Template field in Jenkins.
    • Required container information cannot be deleted, and its name cannot be changed.
    Tool pathInformation that maps to the Tool Locations field in Jenkins, enter the name/home path
    • Only tools that have been added to the global tool list can be selected.
    Support stageSelect the supported stage configuration
    • This information is used for configuring the build pipeline template in the DevOps Console.
    • Required stage information cannot be deselected.
    Table. Input items for adding a Pod Template
Reference

If the user does not check Docker Build in the Supported Stage item,

  • When setting up a project using the App.Template of type Kubernetes or VM(Docker) that requires Docker Build, Jenkins cannot be used.
  • When configuring the build pipeline via Add Build Pipeline, you cannot add a Docker Build stage.

Pod Template Details

To view the detailed information of a Pod Template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (Kubernetes) tab.
  2. Pod Template Management Click the Details button of the agent you want to view from the list. The Agent (Kubernetes) Details screen appears.

Modify Pod Template

To modify the Pod Template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (Kubernetes) tab.
  2. Pod Template Management Click the View Details button of the agent you want to view in the list. The Agent (Kubernetes) Details screen appears.
  3. Click the Edit button.
  4. After editing the content, click the Save button.
  5. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the edit.

Delete Pod Template

To delete a Pod Template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (Kubernetes) tab.
  2. Pod Template Management In the list, click the Details button of the agent you want to view. Agent (Kubernetes) Details screen appears.
  3. Click the Delete button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

Managing Agents (VM)

Note
Only when the tool is Jenkins, the Agent (VM) tab is displayed.

You can manage the list of Nodes available for use in Jenkins.
This feature allows you to operate the Jenkins Management > Node Management menu of Jenkins from the DevOps Console.
DevOps Console only supports one-way registration to Jenkins. (In other words, changes made by the user in DevOps Console will overwrite the information in Jenkins.)

To manage the agent (VM), follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (VM) tab.
  2. Click the Info icon in the Node Management list. The Node Usage Guide popup opens.

Manage Agent Connections

Register the tunneling port that connects the actual Jenkins and the agent (VM). The tunneling port may vary for each Jenkins.

To manage agent connections, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (VM) tab.
  2. Click the Edit icon of Agent Connection Management. The Agent Connection Management popup window opens.
  3. After entering the content, click the Save button.

Add Agent (VM)

To add an agent (VM), follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (VM) tab.
  2. Click the Add button in Agent Connection Management. The Add Agent (VM) screen appears.
  3. After entering the content, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.
    Itemdescription
    Target OSEnter the VM’s OS information.
    Agent nameEnter the VM name.
    Remote root directoryEnter the directory path.
    LabelEnter the Label value to invoke the agent in the Jenkins Pipeline Script.
    Tool pathInformation that maps to the Jenkins Tool Locations field, enter the name/home path
    • Only tools added to the global tool list can be selected.
    Support stageSelect the supported stage configuration
    • This information is used for configuring the build pipeline template in the DevOps Console.
    • Required stage information cannot be deselected.
    Table. Agent (VM) Add Input Items
Note

If the user does not check Docker Build in the Supported Stage item,

  • When configuring a project through the App.Template of type Kubernetes or VM(Docker) that requires Docker Build, the Jenkins cannot be used.
  • Through Add Build Pipeline, when configuring the build pipeline, you cannot add a Docker Build stage.

Agent (VM) Details

To view the detailed information of an agent (VM), follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (VM) tab.
  2. In the Node Management list, click the agent. The Agent (VM) Details screen appears.
  3. Click the Information icon of Jenkins - Agent Connection Information.
  4. Agent Connection Guide The popup window opens.

Integrate Agent (VM)

Note
The agent integration requires that Java be installed on the VM server.

To register and use the agent (VM), you must connect to the actual VM server.

To integrate the agent (VM), follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (VM) tab.
  2. From the Node Management list, click the agent you want to integrate. The Agent (VM) Details screen appears.
  3. Refer to jnlpUrl and secret.
  4. Click the Info icon of Jenkins - Agent Connection Information. The Agent Connection Guide popup opens.
  5. Agent File Download Click the button to download the agent.jar file.
    • There may be issues running depending on the version of agent.jar.
    • You can also download it directly from your own Jenkins. ({JENKINS_URL}/jnlpJars/agent.jar)
  6. Connect to the VM server to be deployed and create a directory.
  7. Copy the downloaded agent.jar file to the generated directory.
  8. Run the following command in the generated directory path.
Color mode
java -jar agent.jar -jnlpUrl {jnlpUrl} -secret {secret}
java -jar agent.jar -jnlpUrl {jnlpUrl} -secret {secret}
Agent (VM) execution command

Modify Agent (VM)

To modify the agent (VM), follow the procedure below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (VM) tab.
  2. Click the agent you want to edit in the Node Management list. The Agent (VM) Details screen appears.
  3. Click the Edit button.
  4. After editing the content, click the Save button.
  5. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Delete Agent (VM)

To delete the agent (VM), follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Agent (VM) tab.
  2. Click the agent you want to delete from the Node Management list. The Agent (VM) Details screen appears.
  3. Click the Delete button.
  4. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete.

Managing Global Libraries

You can manage the list of libraries available in the build pipeline. The Jenkins Management → System Settings → Global Pipeline Libraries menu of Jenkins can be managed through the DevOps Console.
The Credential information linked to the library can be viewed in the Jenkins Management > Manage Credentials menu.
DevOps Console only supports one-way registration to Jenkins. (In other words, changes made by the user in DevOps Console will overwrite the information in Jenkins.)

To manage the agent(VM), follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Global Library tab.

Add Global Library

Caution
If the required library flag is Y, it cannot be edited or deleted.

To add a global library, follow these steps.

  1. Tool Details on the page, click the Global Library tab.
  2. Click the Add button. The Add Global Library screen appears.
  3. After entering the content, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.
    Itemdescription
    Library nameEnter the name of the library.
    typeIt is fixed to SCM and cannot be changed.
    Library URLEnter the Git repository URL where the library is located.
    Default versionEnter the branch name or tag of the Git repository that contains the library.
    IDEnter the ID to pull the library.
    passwordEnter the password to pull the library.
    Table. Global Library Additional Input Items

Global Library Details

To view the detailed information of the global library, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Global Library tab.
  2. In the Global Library list, click the item you want to view in detail. The Global Library Details screen appears.
Reference

When type is SCM, SCM-related information is displayed.

  • Required library status, library name, type, library URL, default version, ID

Modify Global Library

To modify the global library, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Global Library tab.
  2. From the Global Library list, click the item you want to view in detail. The Global Library Details screen appears.
  3. Click the Edit button.
  4. After editing the content, click the Save button.
  5. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete.

Delete Global Library

To delete the global library, follow these steps.

  1. Tool Details on the page, click the Global Library tab.
  2. Global Library Click the item you want to delete from the list. Global Library Detail screen appears.
  3. Click the Delete button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Manage supported tenants/project groups

Note

The tab name is displayed differently depending on the tool type.

  • System Tool/Tenant Tool: Supported Tenant
  • ProjectGroup Tool: Support Information

The user can manage the tenant or project group that will use the tool.

To manage supported tenants or project groups, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Supported Tenant or Supported Information tab.
Note
The Primary icon is displayed for tenant/project groups you manage.

Add supported tenant/project group

To add a supported tenant or project group, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Supported Tenant or Supported Information tab.
  2. Click the Add button. The Add Tenant/Project Group popup window opens.
  3. After entering the content, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.
    Itemdescription
    Tenant/Project GroupSelect the tenant/project group that will use the tool.
    Use statusSelect whether to use the tool in this tenant/project group.
    Whether new creation is possibleSelect whether to allow creating new repositories in this tenant/project group.
    This setting can only be configured for the tool categories listed below.
    • SCM Repository
    • Image Registry
    • Code Quality
    • Artifact Repository
    • Helm Chart Repository
    • Test Management
    • Project Management Software
    Table. Additional Input Items for Supported Tenant/Project Group

Modify supported tenant/project group

To modify the supported tenant/project group, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Supported Tenant or Support Information tab.
  2. In the Supported Tenant or Supported Information list, select Usage status and New creation allowed to modify.

Transfer Management Tenant/Project Group

To transfer the management tenant/project group, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Supported Tenant or Supported Information tab.
  2. Click the Transfer Management Tenant or Transfer Management Project Group button. The Transfer Management Tenant or Transfer Management Project Group popup window opens.
  3. Select the target tenant or project group for transfer, then click the Save button.

Delete supported tenant/project group

To delete a managed tenant/project group, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Supported Tenant or Supported Information tab.
  2. Select the checkbox of the tenant/project group you want to delete.
  3. Click the Delete button.
  4. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete.
Note
A tenant/project group designated as Primary cannot be deleted.

Support K8S cluster management

The user can manage the K8S cluster where the tool will be used.

To manage the supported K8S cluster, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Supported K8S Cluster tab.

Add supported K8S cluster

To add a supported K8S cluster, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Supported K8S Cluster tab.
  2. On the Supported K8S Cluster page, click the Add button. The Add K8S Cluster popup window opens.
  3. After entering the content, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.
    Itemdescription
    K8S clusterSelect the K8S cluster to use with the tool.
    Use statusSelect whether to use the tool in this tenant/project group.
    Whether new creation is possibleSelect whether to allow creating new repositories in this tenant/project group.
    This setting can only be configured for the tool categories below.
    • SCM Repository
    • Image Registry
    • Code Quality
    • Artifact Repository
    • Helm Chart Repository
    • Test Management
    • Project Management Software
    Table. Additional input fields for supported K8S clusters

Modify supported K8S cluster

To modify the supported K8S cluster, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Supported K8S Cluster tab.
  2. In the Supported K8S Clusters list, select Usage Status and New Creation Availability to edit.

Delete supported K8S cluster

To delete the supported K8S cluster, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Supported K8S Cluster tab on the Tool Details page.
  2. Supported K8S clusters list, select the checkbox of the K8S cluster you want to delete.
  3. Click the Delete button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Manage tool operators

To manage tool operators, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Tool Details page, click the Tool Operator tab.

Add tool operator

To add a tool operator, follow these steps.

  1. Tool Details page, click the Tool Operator tab.
  2. Click the Add button. The Add Tool Operator popup opens.
  3. Select the operator and click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Delete tool operator

To delete a tool operator, follow these steps.

  1. Tool Details page, click the Tool Operator tab.
  2. Select the checkbox for the item you want to delete from the tool administrator list.
  3. Click the Delete button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

Managing Jenkins Recommended Plugins

Note
Only when the tool is Jenkins, the plugin tab is displayed.

You can check the installed Jenkins version and whether recommended plugins are installed and their version information, and you can update and install the recommended plugins.

  • Tool version: Jenkins version information
  • Recommended plugins: installation status and version information

Check tool version and recommended plugin information

To check the tool version and recommended plugin information, follow these steps.

  1. Tool Details page, click the Basic Information tab.
  2. If there is recommended plugin information that requires installation or update, an informational popup appears, and clicking OK moves you to the Plugins tab.
  3. On the Tool Details page, click the Plugin tab.
  4. Check the entries for Tool Version, Recommended Plugins.

Install recommended plugins

To install the recommended plugin, follow these steps.

  1. In the Recommended plugins area, select the Install button of the plugin you want to install.
  2. In the Recommended Plugin Installation popup, select the OK button.
  3. A popup appears indicating that the installation request has been completed, and the actual installation details can be viewed via the link in the popup.

Update recommended plugins

To update the recommended plugin, follow these steps.

  1. In the Recommended plugins area, select the Update button of the plugin you want to update.
  2. Select the Confirm button in the Recommended Plugin Update popup.
  3. A popup appears indicating that the installation request has been completed, and the actual installation details can be viewed via the link in the popup.
  4. You must restart Jenkins to apply the update you need to do so.

Delete tool

Note
Tools currently used in the project cannot be deleted.

To uninstall the tool, follow these steps.

  1. On the Tool page, click the tool you want to delete. You will be taken to the Tool Details page.
  2. Click the Delete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.

2.9.2 - App Template

App. A template is a feature provided to enable users to quickly set up a development environment.

The App. template consists of sample source code, Dockerfile, Helm chart, etc., and users can quickly set up a development environment using the App. template when creating a project.

We provide App templates for various frameworks such as Node.js, Python, Spring Boot, and users can also create and register their own App templates.

App. template typeExplanation
System Template
  • It is a tool available globally across the DevOps Console.
  • Only system administrators can manage it.
  • Tenant administrators can only disable it when it is enabled for their tenant.
Tenant Template
  • This template is available for a specific tenant.
  • It can be mapped to multiple tenants for use.
  • The administrator of the tenant can manage it.
ProjectGroup Template
  • This template can only be used within a specific project group.
  • It can be mapped to and used by only one project group.
  • The owner of that project group can manage it.
Table. App. Template Types

App. Getting Started with Template

App. To start template management, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Tools & Templates > App. Templates menu. You will be taken to the App. Templates page.

App. Add Template

Users can add their own App templates.

Source code

App. This is the source code that will be used in the template to build a sample project.

App. A usable SCM Repository must exist in the tenant or project group where the template will be registered. For instructions on registering an SCM Repository tool, see Add Tool.

Register the source code in the SCM Repository in advance. When registering an App template, the corresponding SCM Repository appears, and you should enter the path of the pre-registered source code.

Dockerfile

Note
You can manage the Dockerfile without registering it inside the source code. For related information, see Dockerfile Template Management.
See the official site for documentation and instructions on writing a Dockerfile.

To register an App. Template that supports deployment target projects in the form of Kubernetes or VM (Docker), you must either add a Dockerfile to the source code when registering the source code or register a Dockerfile through 도커파일 템플릿 관리하기.

When writing a Dockerfile, the FROM clause must be fixed as FROM ${BASE_IMAGE}.

The registered ${BASE_IMAGE} value is substituted via the Velocity Template Engine as the image.repository value in the Helm chart when the deployment target is Kubernetes, and as the image path registered in Managing Supported Images when the deployment target is VM (Docker).

Dockerfile file sample

Color mode
FROM ${BASE_IMAGE}

COPY *.jar app.jar
ENTRYPOINT ["java","-jar","/app.jar"]
FROM ${BASE_IMAGE}

COPY *.jar app.jar
ENTRYPOINT ["java","-jar","/app.jar"]
Dockerfile sample

App. Register Template

App. To register a template, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Add button on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Add page.
  2. App. Add Template On the page, select the template support type and click the Start button.
  3. After entering the required information, click the Complete button.
    ItemExplanation
    typeSelect the template type.
    Tenant/Project GroupSelect the tenant/project group to map.
    Table. App. Add Template - Template Supported Type Selection Item
    ItemExplanation
    Deployment targetSelect the deployment target supported by the template
    • Kubernetes: when the deployment target is a cluster using Helm charts
    • VM(Artifact): when the deployment target is a VM server using an Artifact file
    • VM(Docker): when the deployment target is a VM server using a Docker image
    • N/A: when there is no deployment target (ex. Android)
    Template nameApp. Enter the name of the template.
    Application classificationSelect the category of the application included in the template
    • Used to classify the template.
    languageSelect the programming language of the source code included in the template.
    source codeSelect whether the template includes source code.
    Source code repository typeSelect the location where the source code to be included in the template is stored. You can choose SCM or a compressed file (ZIP).
    Repository URLEnter the repository URL where the template source code is located
    • The list of SCM Repository tool available in the tenant and project group will be displayed.
    Repository branchEnter the branch of the repository where the template source code is located.
    Individual authentication informationEnter the credentials to access the repository
    • If you select ‘Do not use’, the credentials used when registering the tool will be used.
    Dockerfile pathEnter the Dockerfile path within the repository
    • Used when building the Docker image.
    code qualitySelect whether to use code quality.
    ExplanationApp. Write a description for the template.
    Document URLEnter the URL of the document that describes the template
    • It will appear as a link on the template selection page when creating a project.
    Template iconSelect the icon to use in the template.
    Build output pathSpecify the build output path and filename.
    Dockerfile typeSelect Dockerfile type
    • You can choose whether to use the Dockerfile file within SosoCode, or to use the information registered in Manage Dockerfile Templates.
    • When you select the GUI template, the Dockerfile Template tab becomes active.
    Table. App. Add Template - Basic Information Input Items
Reference

App. Only when the template’s deployment target is Kubernetes, the supported Helm chart step is added.

  • Select the Helm chart that can be used when deploying with this App template.
  • After selecting the checkbox, you can select the Helm chart list using the Add, Delete buttons in the center.
information
App. The template cannot be used immediately after registration and requires additional configuration.
After completing Add Pipeline Template, please refer to Modify Supported Tenant Information and modify the usage status.

App. Edit template basic information

App. To modify the template’s basic information, follow these steps.

  1. On the App. Template page, click the item you want to edit. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. Click the Basic Information tab on the App. Template Details page.
  3. Click the Edit button in the Basic Information tab.
  4. After editing the required information, click the Save button.
Note
If a pipeline template is not registered, the notification popup window will be activated.

Manage pipeline templates

This is the build pipeline configuration that is automatically set up when a user creates a project using the App template.

Notice
If the pipeline template is not registered, the App template cannot be used.

Add pipeline template

To add a pipeline template, follow these steps.

  1. On the App. Template page, click the item you want to add. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Pipeline Template tab.
  3. Click the Add button on the Pipeline Template tab. You will be taken to the Add Pipeline Template page.
  4. On the Add Pipeline Template page, enter the required information and click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Template nameEnter the name of the pipeline template.
    Base Template
    (Base Template)
    • The default template is used for pipeline configuration when creating a project.
    • If a default template is not registered, it is automatically set to ON, and this setting cannot be changed.
    Support JenkinsSelect the Jenkins that will support this pipeline template
    • A list of CICD pipeline tools available in the tenant and project group is displayed.
    • It is required to refer to the necessary information in the Tools area when configuring stages.
    environment variableEnter environment variable information
    StageEnter information for each stage
    Table. Pipeline Template Additional Input Items
Note
For an explanation and instructions on setting Jenkins environment variables, refer to the official site official site.

Edit pipeline template

To modify the pipeline template, follow these steps.

  1. On the App. Template page, click the item you want to edit. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Pipeline Template tab.
  3. Click the item you want to edit in the Pipeline Template tab. You will be taken to the Pipeline Template Details page.
  4. On the Pipeline Template Details page, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Pipeline Template Edit page.
  5. On the Pipeline Template Edit page, after modifying the information, click the Save button.

Delete pipeline template

information
Pipeline templates marked as (Base) cannot be deleted.

To delete a pipeline template, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to delete on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Pipeline Template tab.
  3. Click the item you want to delete in the Pipeline Template tab. You will be taken to the Pipeline Template Details page.
  4. On the Pipeline Template Details page, click the Delete button.
  5. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup.

Managing Dockerfile Templates

App. In the Basic Information section of the template, the tab appears only when the Dockerfile Type item is GUI Template.

Modify Dockerfile template

Follow these steps to modify the Dockerfile template.

  1. On the App. Template page, click the item you want to edit. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Dockerfile Template tab.
  3. Click the Edit or Create button in the Dockerfile Template tab.
  4. After entering the content in the Dockerfile Template tab, click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Authentication SettingsRegister the authentication information for the image to be used in the FROM clause of a multi-stage build.
    AddAdd the image to be used in the FROM clause of the multi-stage build.
    Multi-stage DockerfileConfigure the Multi-stage based on the credentials and additional items you registered.
    DockerfileCreate a basic Dockerfile.
    Table. Dockerfile Template Modification Input Items
Notice

You can manage it within the source code via Dockerfile without registering a Dockerfile template.

  • When using a Dockerfile file included in the source code, the Basic Information section of the App template must have the Dockerfile Type field set to File in Code Repository.

The FROM clause is automatically set to the image path registered in 지원 이미지 관리하기.

Note
Refer to the official site for explanations and instructions on writing Dockerfile files.

Manage supported tenants/project groups

information

The tab name is displayed differently depending on the template type.

  • System Template/Tenant Template: Supported Tenant
  • ProjectGroup Template: Support Information

The user can manage the tenant or project group where the App template will be used.

To manage supported tenants or project groups, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to edit on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Supported Tenant or Supported Information tab.
Reference
Primary icon appears on the tenant you manage.

Add supported tenant

To add a supported tenant, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to edit on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Supported Tenants tab.
  3. Click the Add button on the Supported Tenant tab. The Add Tenant popup window opens.
  4. Add Tenant In the popup window, select the tenant you want to support, then click the Save button.

Edit supported tenant information

To modify the information of the supported tenant, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to edit on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Supported Tenants tab.
  3. In the Supported Tenant tab, select the verification status and usage status items for the tenant you want to change, and edit them.
    ItemExplanation
    TenantAvailable tenant information.
    Verification statusSelect verification status
    • Verifying
    • Verification complete
    Whether to useSelect usage status
    • It can be changed to Use only when Verification status is Verified.
    Table. Supported Tenant Screen Items
Reference

If the verification status is under verification, only users who have registered the App template can use it.

  • Other users can use the App template after verification and approval are completed.

Edit supported project group information

To modify the information of the supported project group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to edit on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Support Information tab.
  3. Click the Edit button in the Support Information tab. The App. Template Edit screen appears.
  4. On the App. Template Edit screen, select the verification status and usage status items to edit them.
  5. Click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Project GroupAvailable project group information.
    Verification statusSelect verification status
    • Verifying
    • Verification complete
    Whether to useSelect usage
    • Verification status can be changed to Use only when it is Verification completed.
    Table. Support Information Screen Items
Note

If the verification status is “in verification,” only users who have registered the App template can use it.

  • Other users can use the App template after verification and approval are completed.

Transfer Management Tenant

To transfer the management tenant, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to edit on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Supported Tenants tab.
  3. On the Support Tenant tab, click the Transfer Management Tenant button. The Transfer Management Tenant popup window opens.
  4. Management Tenant Transfer In the popup window, after selecting the target tenant for transfer, click the Save button.

Delete supported tenant

To delete a supported tenant, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to edit on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Supported Tenants tab.
  3. In the Supported Tenant tab, select the tenant you want to delete and click the Delete button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.
Caution
A tenant designated as Primary cannot be deleted.

Manage supported images

Information
App. The Supported Images tab appears only when the template’s deployment target is Kubernetes or VM(Docker).

The supported image registered by the user is used in the FROM clause registered in the source code’s Dockerfile or Dockerfile template.

Add supported image

information
When adding a supported image, only the Image Registry tool available in the respective tenant and project group appears in the list.

To add a supported image, follow the steps below.

  1. On the App. Template page, click the item you want to edit. You will be taken to the App. Template Detail page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Supported Image tab.
  3. In the Supported Image tab, click the Add button. The Add Supported Image popup window opens.
  4. Add supported image After entering the information in the popup window, click the Connection Test button.
  5. Save button is enabled, click the Save button.
  6. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.
    ItemExplanation
    Enter image informationEnter the supported image and authentication information.
    Use the registrant’s authentication informationThis is an option that can be selected when the chosen image registry is a tool that cannot grant permissions (e.g., SCR).
    • If not checked, when a supported image user creates a project, the Pull permission for the image entered by the supported image user is added. If the tool cannot grant permissions, no permission granting is performed.
    • If not checked, when a supported image user creates a project, the authentication credentials of the supported image registrant are used instead of the supported image user’s permissions.
    Table. Additional Input Fields for Supported Image
Caution

Precautions when checking the use of the registrant’s authentication information

  • Since the registrant’s authentication credentials may be exposed to users of the supported image, it should be used only when necessary.
  • If the image repository only supports pulling images, you must select it to avoid problems during use. You must specify an image repository that will be used exclusively for pulling. (If selected, pulling and pushing cannot be performed simultaneously on the same image repository.)
  • The registrant’s credentials are used in the project > image repository > pull-only image. These credentials cannot be changed by supported image users, and if the registrant’s credentials are re-registered in a supported image, they are updated uniformly.

Delete supported image

To delete the support image, follow these steps.

  1. On the App. Template page, click the item you want to edit. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Supported Image tab.
  3. In the Supported Images tab, select the checkbox of the item to delete and click the Delete button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.

Manage supported Helm charts

information
App. The Kubernetes deployment target only, the Supported Helm Chart tab is displayed.
Refer to Add Helm Chart for registering supported Helm charts.

The supported Helm chart registered by the user is used when creating a project using the App. template.

Add support for Helm chart

To add a supported Helm chart, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to edit on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. App. Template Details on the page, click the Supported Helm Chart tab.
  3. In the Supported Helm Chart tab, click the Edit button. The App. Template Edit screen appears.
  4. App. Template Modification On the screen’s Helm Chart List, select the checkbox of the Helm chart to be used, then add it to the Selected Helm Chart List using the Add button, and click the Save button.

Modify the supported Helm chart

To modify the supported Helm chart, follow these steps.

  1. On the App. Template page, click the item you want to edit. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. Click the Supported Helm Chart tab on the App. Template Details page.
  3. Click the Edit button in the Supported Helm Chart tab. The App. Template Edit screen appears.
  4. On the App. Template Edit screen’s Helm Chart List, select the checkboxes of the Helm charts to use, then modify the Selected Helm Chart List using the Add and Delete buttons, and click the Save button.

Delete supported Helm chart

To delete the support Helm chart, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to edit on the App. Template page. You will be taken to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Supported Helm Chart tab.
  3. Click the Edit button in the Supported Helm Chart tab. The App. Template Edit screen appears.
  4. App. Template Edit on the Selected Helm Chart List screen, select the checkbox of the Helm chart to delete, then delete it using the Delete button and click the Save button.

App. Delete Template

App. To delete the template, follow these steps.

  1. Click the item you want to delete on the App. Template page. Navigate to the App. Template Details page.
  2. On the App. Template Details page, click the Basic Information tab.
  3. Click the Delete button on the Basic Information tab.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.

2.9.3 - Register User-installed Jenkins Tool

Reference
  • It is recommended to use the Samsung Cloud Platform Marketplace for installing and operating Jenkins.
  • If you cannot use the Marketplace or need to register a self‑installed Jenkins as a tool in the DevOps Console, refer to this document.
  • This document guides the registration of the Jenkins tool in DevOps Console, so it provides only a brief overview of Jenkins installation and operation.

Getting started with registering a user-installed Jenkins tool

Install Jenkins and plugins.

Jenkins installation

Before installing

To register Jenkins in the DevOps Console, Jenkins generally must meet the following conditions. If there are other conditions, register an SR before installation to verify.

  • Use a domain for Jenkins access
  • Jenkins domain is registered in DNS
  • Use HTTPS (port 443) and a public certificate for Jenkins communication.

Installation

Install Jenkins on a VM or Kubernetes

Plugin Installation

Install the following plugins in Jenkins.

Plugin IDName
apache-httpcomponents-client-4-apiApache HttpComponents Client 4.x API
credentialsCredentials
credentials-bindingCredentials Binding
githubGitHub
jobConfigHistoryJob Configuration History
kubernetesKubernetes
mask-passwordsMask Passwords
maven-pluginMaven Integration
matrix-authMatrix Authorization Strategy
metricsMetrics
pipeline-stage-viewPipeline: Stage View
pipeline-utility-stepsPipeline Utility Steps
script-securityScript Security
ssh-stepsSSH Pipeline Steps
workflow-aggregatorPipeline
workflow-step-apiPipeline: Step API
Table. List of installed plugins
Reference
You can view the plugin details at https://plugins.jenkins.io/{Plugin ID}.

Jenkins configuration

Common Settings

Jenkins Administration > System

ItemvalueExplanation
of executors0Set to 0 to restrict direct build execution on the Controller and allow builds only on the Agent.
Jenkins URL(ex) https://{YOUR_DOMAIN}/jenkins/
System Admin e-mail address(ex) admin@example.com
Table. Jenkins Management > System Settings

Jenkins Administration > Security

ItemvalueExplanation
AuthorizationProject-based Matrix Authorization Strategy
Authenticated UsersOverall > Read
<ADMIN_USER>Overall > AdministerAdd admin account using Add user
Table. Jenkins Management > Security Settings

Support email format for Jenkins Username

  • By default, Jenkins does not allow the @ sign or dot (.) to be used in the login username. However, since DevOps Console uses an email address as the username, we configure Jenkins to allow email addresses as usernames as well.
  • Create the file /{JENKINS_HOME}/init.groovy.d/init.groovy, add the following content, and restart Jenkins.
    • (ex) /var/jenkins_home/init.groovy.d/init.groovy
Color mode
hudson.security.HudsonPrivateSecurityRealm.ID_REGEX=/^[\w-\.\@\_]+$/
hudson.security.HudsonPrivateSecurityRealm.ID_REGEX=/^[\w-\.\@\_]+$/
Code block. init.groovy

Additional Jenkins configuration installed on Kubernetes

RBAC

Configure RBAC on Jenkins’s Service Account so that Jenkins can create Pods in Kubernetes.

Color mode
# In GKE need to get RBAC permissions first with
# kubectl create clusterrolebinding cluster-admin-binding --clusterrole=cluster-admin [--user=<user-name>|--group=<group-name>]
 
---
apiVersion: v1
kind: ServiceAccount
metadata:
  name: jenkins
 
---
kind: Role
apiVersion: rbac.authorization.k8s.io/v1
metadata:
  name: jenkins
rules:
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["pods"]
  verbs: ["create","delete","get","list","patch","update","watch"]
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["pods/exec"]
  verbs: ["create","delete","get","list","patch","update","watch"]
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["pods/log"]
  verbs: ["get","list","watch"]
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["events"]
  verbs: ["watch"]
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["secrets"]
  verbs: ["get"]
 
---
apiVersion: rbac.authorization.k8s.io/v1
kind: RoleBinding
metadata:
  name: jenkins
roleRef:
  apiGroup: rbac.authorization.k8s.io
  kind: Role
  name: jenkins
subjects:
- kind: ServiceAccount
  name: jenkins
# In GKE need to get RBAC permissions first with
# kubectl create clusterrolebinding cluster-admin-binding --clusterrole=cluster-admin [--user=<user-name>|--group=<group-name>]
 
---
apiVersion: v1
kind: ServiceAccount
metadata:
  name: jenkins
 
---
kind: Role
apiVersion: rbac.authorization.k8s.io/v1
metadata:
  name: jenkins
rules:
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["pods"]
  verbs: ["create","delete","get","list","patch","update","watch"]
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["pods/exec"]
  verbs: ["create","delete","get","list","patch","update","watch"]
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["pods/log"]
  verbs: ["get","list","watch"]
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["events"]
  verbs: ["watch"]
- apiGroups: [""]
  resources: ["secrets"]
  verbs: ["get"]
 
---
apiVersion: rbac.authorization.k8s.io/v1
kind: RoleBinding
metadata:
  name: jenkins
roleRef:
  apiGroup: rbac.authorization.k8s.io
  kind: Role
  name: jenkins
subjects:
- kind: ServiceAccount
  name: jenkins
code block. service-account.yml

Jenkins Management > Clouds

kubernetes

  • Add the kubernetes cloud.
  • Set up the Kubernetes cloud as follows. Use the default values for the remaining items.
ItemvalueExplanation
Cloud namekubernetes
TypeKubernetes selection
Kubernetes URLhttps://kubernetes.defaultCreate a Pod (Agent) in the cluster where Jenkins is running
Disable https certificatecheck
Kubernetes Namespace(example) jenkinsEnter the Namespace where the Jenkins Controller is running, and a Pod (Agent) is created in that Namespace.
WebSocketcheck
Jenkins URL(example) http://{JENKINS_SERVICE_NAME}:{PORT}/jenkins
  • Jenkins URL used when invoking Pod(Agent) → Pod(Controller)
  • Use the Kubernetes Service name because it is called within the same namespace
Table. Jenkins Management > Clouds > kubernetes Configuration

kubernetes > Pod Templates

  • Add a Pod Template.
  • BASE-TEMPLATE is a parent template used in the DevOps Console to define values that should be shared across all Pod Templates.
ItemvalueExplanation
NameBASE-TEMPLATE
Image Pull Secret{IMAGE_PULL_SECRET} Enter nameCreate a Secret in the Namespace so that the Pod(Agent) image can be pulled, and enter its name.
Table. Jenkins Management > Clouds > kubernetes > Pod Templates Settings

Register Jenkins tool in DevOps Console

Register Firewall

Refer to the table below and register the firewall in Jenkins.

OriginDestinationDestination Port
User install JenkinsDevOps Console web443
DevOps Console source IPUser install Jenkins web443
Table. Jenkins (Destination) Firewall List
Reference
To check the source IP of the DevOps Console, click the URL ⓘ on the Add Tool screen. You can view the DevOps Console’s source IP in the tooltip.

DevOps Console Tasks

  • For detailed information about registering the Jenkins tool, see Add Tool
  • In the tool registration step, check the plugins installed on Jenkins, and if any plugins need to be installed, a plugin installation guide page will be displayed. Download and install the plugins as instructed.

Jenkins Verification

Jenkins Management > System

Global Trusted Pipeline Libraries

  • Check that cicdpaas is configured in the Library.
  • If it is not configured
    • Verify the communication between DevOps Console and Jenkins.
    • DevOps Console > Management > Jenkins detail screen > Check the settings in the Global Library tab.

DevOps Console Credentials

  • Test Connection Click the button to confirm that Success appears.

Add an agent (VM) to Jenkins

DevOps Console Tasks

Add Agent (VM)

Jenkins Tasks

Jenkins Management > Nodes > Agent Detail View

Verify that the Agent added in the DevOps Console has been created. Run the Agent according to the guide on the Jenkins screen and connect it to Jenkins.

Add an agent (Kubernetes) to Jenkins

Before Adding a Kubernetes Agent

Create User‑Jenkins Agent Image

  • For CI/CD in Jenkins, an agent image is required.
  • Create a Jenkins agent image that matches the user’s needs by using the default images provided by Jenkins.
  • After creating the image, push it to the user’s image repository.
Color mode
FROM jenkins/inbound-agent:latest-jdk17

USER root

# Docker CLI
RUN curl -L0 "https://download.docker.com/linux/static/stable/x86_64/docker-29.1.3.tgz" -o /tmp/docker.tgz && \
    tar --extract \
      --file /tmp/docker.tgz \
      --strip-components 1 \
      --directory /usr/local/bin/ && \
    rm /tmp/docker.tgz

COPY --from=docker/buildx-bin /buildx /usr/libexec/docker/cli-plugins/docker-buildx

# Install your build tools...
# xxx

USER jenkins
FROM jenkins/inbound-agent:latest-jdk17

USER root

# Docker CLI
RUN curl -L0 "https://download.docker.com/linux/static/stable/x86_64/docker-29.1.3.tgz" -o /tmp/docker.tgz && \
    tar --extract \
      --file /tmp/docker.tgz \
      --strip-components 1 \
      --directory /usr/local/bin/ && \
    rm /tmp/docker.tgz

COPY --from=docker/buildx-bin /buildx /usr/libexec/docker/cli-plugins/docker-buildx

# Install your build tools...
# xxx

USER jenkins
code block. Dockerfile example

Docker‑in‑Docker Image

  • In the DevOps Console, Docker in Docker is used to create Docker images in a Kubernetes environment.
  • Use Docker’s provided dind (Docker‑in‑Docker) image and push it to your repository.

DevOps Console Tasks

  • Add Pod Template
    • By default, one (or multiple) agents are registered. Delete the default registered agent.
  • If you need to build a Docker image, select Docker in Docker.
  • Enter the JNLP image URL with the Jenkins agent address of the user you created above.

Jenkins Tasks

Jenkins Management > Clouds > Kubernetes > Pod Templates

  • The agent (Kubernetes) added from the DevOps Console is registered as a Pod Template.
  • If Docker‑in‑Docker is selected in DevOps Console, the default image address is pre‑filled in the dind container. Replace it with the image address you pushed to your repository.

2.10 - Deployment Target

2.10.1 - K8S Cluster

Users can register a K8S cluster in DevOps Console and deploy various applications through DevOps Console.

Users can add, edit, and delete K8S clusters and namespaces. Added K8S clusters and namespaces can be selected and used in various menus such as project creation (Getting Started with Project Creation), helm install (Getting Started with Helm Install), etc.

Reference
To use the K8S cluster from menus such as project creation and helm install, you must have permissions on the namespace.

Getting Started with a K8S Cluster

To begin managing the K8S cluster, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. Navigate to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.

Add a K8S cluster

To add a K8S cluster, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. On the K8S Cluster page, click the Add button. You will be taken to the Add K8S Cluster page.
  4. Add K8S Cluster page, after entering the basic information and connection details, click the Connection Test button.
  5. After selecting the Helm version, click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    K8S cluster namePlease enter the cluster name.
    K8S Cluster IDEnter the cluster ID.
    The cluster ID is a unique identifier used to distinguish clusters; please determine and enter it yourself.
    CA CertificateEnter the server’s certificate information to be used for configuring the kubeconfig file
    • Enter the contents of clusters[0].cluster.certificate-authority-data from the existing kubeconfig file.
    • Contact the cluster provider (administrator) and then enter it.
    • If verification is not possible, enter a temporary value (e.g., temp) and replace it with the correct value once verification is possible.
    Authentication methodSelect the admin token method.
    API server URLEnter the Kubernetes API Server address.
    admin tokenEnter the Token with Admin privileges to use for configuring the kubeconfig file.
    Please refer to Check Cluster Admin Token.
    Helm versionSelect Helm version
    • A list of Helm versions available for the K8S cluster version is displayed.
    Table. Add K8S Cluster – Add using admin token authentication
    ItemExplanation
    Authentication methodSelect the client certificate method.
    API server URLEnter the Kubernetes API Server address.
    client certificateEnter the client certificate information.
    Client KeyEnter the client Key information.
    Table. Add K8S Cluster - Item for adding by authenticating with a client certificate
    ItemExplanation
    Authentication methodSelect the kubeconfig file upload method.
    kubeconfig fileBrowse button to select the kubeconfig file
    • Only files with the .yml or .yaml extension can be uploaded.
    • If the file is uploaded successfully, the CA Certificate, API server URL, user, admin token, or client certificate will be populated automatically.
    API server URLSelect the Kubernetes API Server address.
    userSelect the user to authenticate
    • Depending on the selected user, the admin token or client certificate information is displayed below
    Table. Adding K8S Cluster - Adding via kubeconfig file upload item

Managing a K8S cluster

Modify K8S cluster

To modify the K8S cluster, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. From the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. On the K8S Cluster Details page, click the Edit button.
  5. After editing the information, click the Connection Test button.
  6. After selecting the Helm version, click the Save button.

Delete K8S cluster

To delete a K8S cluster, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. From the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. On the K8S Cluster Details page, click the Delete button.
  5. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete the deletion.

Add a member to a K8S cluster

To add a K8S cluster member, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. Navigate to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. In the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. On the K8S Cluster Details page, click the Members tab.
  5. When you click the Add button in the Member tab, the Add Member popup window opens.
  6. Add Member In the popup, enter the email address and click the Search icon.
  7. Click the Add button to add the member to the list below.
  8. After selecting the permission, click the Save button to complete adding the member.

Delete K8S cluster member

To delete a K8S cluster member, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. From the list on the K8S cluster page, click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the K8S cluster details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. On the K8S Cluster Details page, click the Members tab.
  5. In the Member tab, select the checkbox of the user you want to delete.
  6. Click the Delete button to remove the selected user from the members.

Managing K8S Cluster Permission Requests

To approve or reject a K8S cluster access request, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. Click the K8S cluster permission request item for the cluster whose permission request you want to approve. The displayed number indicates the number of permissions requested.
  4. K8S Cluster Permission Request Approval The popup window opens.
  5. Click the application you want to approve or reject.
  6. After entering your comment, click the Approve or Reject button.
Note
A comment is required to reject a permission request.

View K8S cluster permission approval history

To view the K8S cluster permission request approval history, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. From the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S Cluster. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S Cluster.
  4. Click the Approval History tab. The approval history list appears.
Note
Access is allowed only for users with Administrator privileges on the K8S cluster.

Managing namespaces

Notice
  • To use the K8S cluster from menus such as project creation and helm install, you must have permissions on the namespace.
  • You cannot create a namespace in the actual K8S cluster. You can only import an already created namespace into the DevOps Console.

Import namespace

To import the namespace, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. On the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster from the list. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Click the Namespace tab. The namespace list appears.
  5. On the Namespace tab screen, clicking the Import button opens the Import Namespace popup.
  6. Namespace Import In the popup window, select the namespace and click the Save button to complete the namespace import.

Delete namespace

Notice
Only the namespace information managed by the DevOps Console is deleted, and the actual namespace in the cluster is not deleted.

To delete a namespace, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. On the K8S cluster page, click the K8S cluster from the list. You will be taken to the K8S cluster details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Click the Namespace tab. The namespace list appears.
  5. On the Namespace tab screen, clicking a namespace navigates to the Namespace Details page.
  6. On the Namespace Details page, click the Delete button to complete the namespace deletion.

Adding a namespace member

To add a namespace member, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. It navigates to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. From the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Click the Namespace tab. The namespace list appears.
  5. Namespace tab screen, when you click the namespace, you are taken to the Namespace Details page.
  6. Namespace Details page, when you click the Members tab, the namespace member list appears.
  7. When you click the Add button, the Add Member popup opens.
  8. In the Add Member popup, enter the email address and click the Search icon.
  9. Click the Add button to add the member to the list below.
  10. After selecting the permission, click the Save button to complete adding the member.

Delete namespace member

To delete a namespace member, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. On the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster from the list. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Click the Namespace tab. The namespace list appears.
  5. On the Namespace tab screen, clicking the namespace takes you to the Namespace Details page.
  6. Namespace Details page, when you click the Members tab, the namespace member list appears.
  7. Select the checkbox of the user you want to delete from the list.
  8. Click the Delete button to remove the selected user from the members.

Manage namespace permission requests

To approve or reject a namespace permission request, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. From the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the Namespace Permission Request item for the cluster whose permission request you want to approve. The displayed number indicates the number of permission requests.
  4. Namespace Permission Request Approval A popup window opens.
  5. Select the checkbox for the application you want to approve or reject.
  6. After entering your comment, click the Approve or Reject button.
Reference
Providing a comment is required to reject a permission request.

View namespace permission request approval history

To view the namespace permission request approval history, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. In the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Namespace tab, click it. The namespace list appears.
  5. On the Namespace tab screen, clicking a namespace takes you to the Namespace Details page.
  6. Namespace Details page, when you click the Approval History tab, the approval history list appears.

Managing Ingress Domains

information
  • This is reference information that is managed only in the DevOps Console.
  • The registered information is displayed so that users can refer to it when creating a project or performing a Helm install using the cluster.

Add Ingress Domain

To add an ingress domain, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. On the K8S cluster page, click the K8S cluster from the list. You will be taken to the K8S cluster details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Click the Ingress Domain tab. The Ingress Domain list appears.
  5. Ingress Domain tab screen, when you click the Add button, the Add Ingress Domain Information popup opens.
  6. Add Ingress Domain Information Enter the information in the popup window and click the Save button to complete adding the ingress domain.
    ItemExplanation
    Node selectorEnter the node selector.
    It is composed of a key that includes a prefix separated by the first slash (/) of the input value, and its corresponding value.
    The prefix is optional.
    e.g., kubernetes.io/nodetype: app
    Proxy IPEnter the Proxy Server IP or Proxy Server LoadBalancer IP.
    Ingress domainEnter the domain that the application will use by default.
    Ingress classEnter the Ingress controller class.
    Table. Ingress Domain Additional Input Items

Modify Ingress Domain

To modify the Ingress domain, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. From the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Click the Ingress Domain tab. The Ingress Domain list appears.
  5. On the Ingress Domain tab screen, when you click the Ingress Domain you want to edit, the Edit Ingress Domain Information popup opens.
  6. Edit Ingress Domain Information In the popup window, modify the information and click the Save button to complete the Ingress domain edit.

Delete Ingress Domain

To modify the Ingress domain, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > K8S Cluster menu. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster page.
  3. From the list on the K8S Cluster page, click the K8S cluster. You will be taken to the K8S Cluster Details page of the selected K8S cluster.
  4. Ingress Domain Click the tab. Ingress Domain list appears.
  5. On the Ingress Domain tab, select the checkbox of the Ingress Domain you want to delete.
  6. On the Ingress Domain tab screen, click the Delete button to delete the selected ingress domain.

2.10.1.1 - Verify Cluster Admin Token

To register a K8S cluster, you must verify the cluster’s Admin Token.

An Admin Token refers to the token value of a ServiceAccount that has the ClusterRole/cluster-admin bound by a ClusterRoleBinding.

Preparation before start

information

Before checking the Admin Token, review and prepare the following.

  • Environment where the kubectl CLI can be used
  • Check cluster admin permissions
    • View and create ClusterRole, ClusterRoleBinding
    • Namespace and ServiceAccount lookup and creation
  • The cluster-admin ClusterRole is listed.
Color mode
$ kubectl get clusterrole cluster-admin
NAME            CREATED AT
cluster-admin   2022-12-09T08:21:50Z
$ kubectl get clusterrole cluster-admin
NAME            CREATED AT
cluster-admin   2022-12-09T08:21:50Z
cluster-admin ClusterRole query result

Query Admin Token

View existing generated Admin Token

  1. Retrieve the ClusterRoleBinding that has ClusterRole/cluster-admin bound.
  2. Check the ServiceAccount that is bound by a ClusterRoleBinding.
    Color mode
    # admin token lookup
    $ kubectl get clusterrolebinding | grep ClusterRole/cluster-admin
    [crb_name]     ClusterRole/cluster-admin     77d
    
    $ kubectl describe clusterrolebinding [crb_name]
    Name:         [crb_name]
    Labels:       <none>
    Annotations:  <none>
    Role:
    Kind:  ClusterRole
    Name:  cluster-admin
    Subjects:
    Kind            Name       Namespace
      ----            ----       ---------
    ServiceAccount  [sa_name]  [namespace_name]
    # admin token lookup
    $ kubectl get clusterrolebinding | grep ClusterRole/cluster-admin
    [crb_name]     ClusterRole/cluster-admin     77d
    
    $ kubectl describe clusterrolebinding [crb_name]
    Name:         [crb_name]
    Labels:       <none>
    Annotations:  <none>
    Role:
    Kind:  ClusterRole
    Name:  cluster-admin
    Subjects:
    Kind            Name       Namespace
      ----            ----       ---------
    ServiceAccount  [sa_name]  [namespace_name]
    Result of retrieving previously generated Admin Token
  3. Check the Secret associated with the ServiceAccount and retrieve the token (Admin Token).
    Color mode
    # Secret lookup
    $ kubectl get secret -n [namespace_name] | grep [sa_name]
    [sa_name]-token-xxxxx                            kubernetes.io/service-account-token   3      77d
    
    # token lookup
    $ kubectl describe secret [sa_name]-token-xxxxx -n [namespace_name]
    Name:         [sa_name]-token-xxxxx
    ...<중략>...
    Data
    ====
    ca.crt:     1070 bytes
    namespace:  11 bytes
    token:      eyJhbGciOiJSUzI1NiI...
    # Secret lookup
    $ kubectl get secret -n [namespace_name] | grep [sa_name]
    [sa_name]-token-xxxxx                            kubernetes.io/service-account-token   3      77d
    
    # token lookup
    $ kubectl describe secret [sa_name]-token-xxxxx -n [namespace_name]
    Name:         [sa_name]-token-xxxxx
    ...<중략>...
    Data
    ====
    ca.crt:     1070 bytes
    namespace:  11 bytes
    token:      eyJhbGciOiJSUzI1NiI...
    Result of retrieving the Secret and token associated with the ServiceAccount

Create Admin Token

  1. Create the Namespace for the ServiceAccount. If it already exists, proceed to the next step.
    Color mode
    $ kubectl create namespace [namespace_name]
    
    # ex) kubectl create namespace my-app
    $ kubectl create namespace [namespace_name]
    
    # ex) kubectl create namespace my-app
    Admin Token creation command
  2. Create the [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-sa.yaml file and then run it.
    Color mode
    apiVersion: v1
    kind: ServiceAccount
    metadata:
    name: [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin
    namespace: [namespace_name]
    apiVersion: v1
    kind: ServiceAccount
    metadata:
    name: [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin
    namespace: [namespace_name]
    ServiceAccount creation example
    Color mode
    # Create ServiceAccount
    $ kubectl apply -f [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-sa.yaml -n [namespace_name]
    
    # ex) kubectl apply -f my-app-additional-cluster-admin-sa.yaml -n my-app
    # Create ServiceAccount
    $ kubectl apply -f [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-sa.yaml -n [namespace_name]
    
    # ex) kubectl apply -f my-app-additional-cluster-admin-sa.yaml -n my-app
    ServiceAccount creation command
  3. Create the [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-crb.yaml file and then run it.
    Color mode
    kind: ClusterRoleBinding
    apiVersion: rbac.authorization.k8s.io/v1
    metadata:
       name: [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin
    subjects:
    - kind: ServiceAccount
      name: [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin
      namespace: [namespace_name]
    roleRef:
      kind: ClusterRole
      name: cluster-admin
      apiGroup: ""
    kind: ClusterRoleBinding
    apiVersion: rbac.authorization.k8s.io/v1
    metadata:
       name: [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin
    subjects:
    - kind: ServiceAccount
      name: [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin
      namespace: [namespace_name]
    roleRef:
      kind: ClusterRole
      name: cluster-admin
      apiGroup: ""
    Example of creating a ClusterRoleBinding
    Color mode
    # Create ClusterRoleBinding
    $ kubectl apply -f [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-crb.yaml
    
    # ex) kubectl apply -f my-app-additional-cluster-admin-crb.yaml
    # Create ClusterRoleBinding
    $ kubectl apply -f [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-crb.yaml
    
    # ex) kubectl apply -f my-app-additional-cluster-admin-crb.yaml
    Command to create a ClusterRoleBinding
  4. Check the Secret associated with the ServiceAccount and retrieve the token (Admin Token).
    Color mode
    # Secret lookup
    $ kubectl get secret -n [namespace_name] | grep [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin
    [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-token-xxxxx   kubernetes.io/service-account-token   3      4m53s
    
    # Token lookup
    $ kubectl describe secret [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-token-xxxxx -n [namespace_name]
    Name:         [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-token-xxxxx
    ...<중략>...
    Data
    ====
    ca.crt:     1111 bytes
    namespace:  6 bytes
    token:      eyJhbGciOiJSUzI1Ni...
    # Secret lookup
    $ kubectl get secret -n [namespace_name] | grep [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin
    [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-token-xxxxx   kubernetes.io/service-account-token   3      4m53s
    
    # Token lookup
    $ kubectl describe secret [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-token-xxxxx -n [namespace_name]
    Name:         [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-token-xxxxx
    ...<중략>...
    Data
    ====
    ca.crt:     1111 bytes
    namespace:  6 bytes
    token:      eyJhbGciOiJSUzI1Ni...
    Result of retrieving the Secret and token associated with the ServiceAccount
    Reference
    If there is no generated Secret (after Kuberentes 1.24), create one manually and then retrieve the token.
    Color mode
    apiVersion: v1
    kind: Secret
    type: kubernetes.io/service-account-token
    metadata:
    name: [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-token
    namespace: [namespace_name]
    annotations:
    kubernetes.io/service-account.name: "[namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin"
    apiVersion: v1
    kind: Secret
    type: kubernetes.io/service-account-token
    metadata:
    name: [namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin-token
    namespace: [namespace_name]
    annotations:
    kubernetes.io/service-account.name: "[namespace_name]-additional-cluster-admin"
    Example of creating a secret

Verify Admin Token Validity

You can verify the validity of the retrieved Admin Token value by editing the ~/.kube/config file.

  1. Modify ~/.kube/config to use a token for user authentication.
    Modify to ex) users[0].user.token and then enter the Admin Token value.
    Color mode
    apiVersion: v1
    clusters:
    - cluster:
        certificate-authority-data: LS0...
        server: https://devopscluster-12345.sk...
      name: devopscluster-12345
    contexts:
    - context:
        cluster: devopscluster-12345
        user: user
      name: user@devopscluster-12345
    current-context: user@devopscluster-12345
    kind: Config
    users:
    - name: user
      user:
        token: [admin_token]
    apiVersion: v1
    clusters:
    - cluster:
        certificate-authority-data: LS0...
        server: https://devopscluster-12345.sk...
      name: devopscluster-12345
    contexts:
    - context:
        cluster: devopscluster-12345
        user: user
      name: user@devopscluster-12345
    current-context: user@devopscluster-12345
    kind: Config
    users:
    - name: user
      user:
        token: [admin_token]
    Example of editing ~/.kube/config
  2. Run the kubectl command to verify that you have cluster-admin privileges.
    Color mode
    $ kubectl get nodes
    $ kubectl get namespace
    $ kubectl get all -n kube-system
    $ kubectl create namespace admin-test
    $ kubectl delete namespace admin-test
    
    # Run other commands
    $ kubectl get nodes
    $ kubectl get namespace
    $ kubectl get all -n kube-system
    $ kubectl create namespace admin-test
    $ kubectl delete namespace admin-test
    
    # Run other commands
    Command to check cluster-admin permissions

2.10.2 - VM Server Group

A VM server group is a logical unit for grouping and managing VM servers.

Users can add, modify, and delete VM server groups and VM servers. Configured VM server groups and VM servers can be used as deployment target VMs in project creation (배포대상 환경 설정하기) or VM deployment (VM 배포 추가하기).

Deployment methodExplanation
SSHUsing Secure Shell (SSH), Jenkins, where the build pipeline runs, directly deploys to the Target VM server.
  • SSH communication from Jenkins to the Target VM is required.
agentYou must refer to Connecting the Agent and run the agent on the Target VM server.
Jenkins, where the build pipeline runs, does not execute deployments directly. The running agent collects deployment information from the DevOps Console via REST API and executes it.
  • If Rollback is not used, the deployment files are stored in the DevOps Console. (Maximum file size: 200 MB).
  • If Rollback is used, the deployment files are stored in the Rollback Artifact Repository selected by the user. (Maximum file size is managed by the Rollback Artifact Repository).
  • REST API communication from Target VM to DevOps Console is required.
  • (When using Rollback) communication between Target VM and Rollback Artifact Repository is required.
Table. SSH method vs Agent method
Caution

If SSH or an agent runs with root privileges, there is a risk that malicious commands could compromise the entire server.

  • It is recommended to use an account other than the root account.

Getting Started with VM Server Group

To start managing VM server groups, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Deploy Target > VM Server Group menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.

Add VM server group

To add a VM server group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Management icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the Add button. It navigates to the Add VM Server Group page.
  4. Enter the basic information, then click the Save button to complete the VM server group configuration.
    ItemExplanation
    Server group nameEnter the VM server group name.
    ExplanationPlease enter a description.
    typeSelect the type of VM server group
    • SSH: Perform deployment using SSH commands when deploying a VM.
    • Agent: Perform deployment using an agent when deploying a VM. (Connect Agent)
    VM server
    • Add: Add the VM server that belongs to the VM server group.
    • Delete: Check the checkbox of the VM server you want to delete from the VM server group, then click Delete to remove it.
    Table. VM Server Group Add Input Items

Add VM server

To add a VM server, you need Manager permission for the corresponding VM server group.

Note
The Add VM Server popup opens differently depending on the type of VM server group.

To add a VM server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. Navigate to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. VM server group page, click the VM server group in the VM server group list where you want to add a VM server. You will be taken to the VM server group detail page.
  4. On the VM Server Group Details page, click the Add button. You will be taken to the Add VM Server page.
  5. Add VM Server page, after entering the basic information, click the Add button to complete the VM server configuration.
    ItemExplanation
    Server nameEnter the VM server name.
    ExplanationEnter the description.
    IPPlease enter the IP.
    SSH PortEnter the port of the VM server to use for SSH connections.
    OSPlease enter the OS.
    LocationPlease select a location.
    Authentication informationEnter the authentication information for the VM server to be used for SSH connections.
    Secret KeyThis is the secret key for authenticating the VM server where the agent is installed.
    Table. VM Server Additional Input Items

Modify VM server group

To modify a VM server group, you need Manager permission for that VM server group.

To modify a VM server group, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the VM Server Group you want to edit from the list. You will be taken to the VM Server Group Details page.
  4. On the VM Server Group Details page, click the Edit button. You will be taken to the Edit VM Server Group page.
  5. After completing the edit, click the Save button to finish modifying the VM server group.

Modify VM server

To modify a VM server, you need Manager permission for the corresponding VM server group.

To modify the VM server, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the VM Server Group you want to edit from the list of VM server groups. You will be taken to the VM Server Group Details page.
  4. VM Server Group Details page’s VM server list, click the VM server you want to edit. You will be taken to the VM Server Details page.
  5. On the VM Server Details page, clicking the Edit button navigates to the VM Server Edit page.
  6. On the VM Server Edit page, after completing the edit, click the Save button to finish editing the VM server.

Delete VM server group

To delete a VM server group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. Navigate to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Deploy Target > VM Server Group menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. VM server group page’s VM server group list, click the VM server group you want to delete. You will be taken to the VM server group details page.
  4. On the VM server group details page, click the Delete button to complete the VM server group deletion.

Delete VM server

To delete a VM server, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > VM Server Group menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the VM server group of the VM server you want to delete from the VM server group list. You will be taken to the VM Server Group Details page.
  4. On the VM Server Group Details page, click the VM server you want to delete. You will be taken to the VM Server Details page.
  5. On the VM server details page, click the Delete button to complete the VM server deletion.

Managing VM Server Group Members

To manage members of a VM server group, you need Manager permission for that VM server group.

Add VM server group member

To add a member to a VM server group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. VM Server Group page’s VM Server Group list, click the VM Server Group you want to add a member to. You will be taken to the VM Server Group Details page.
  4. On the VM Server Group Details page, click the User tab.
  5. When you click the Add button on the User tab, the Add Member popup window opens.
  6. After completing the setup, click the Confirm button to finish adding a VM server group member. (Managers can modify or delete the server group, and Members can use the server group when creating projects or adding pipelines.)

Delete VM server group member

To delete a member from a VM server group, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM server group page, click the VM server group in the list from which you want to delete a member. You will be taken to the VM server group details page.
  4. On the VM Server Group Details page, click the User tab.
  5. In the User list, select the checkbox of the user you want to delete.
  6. Click the Delete button to remove the selected user from the VM server group members.

Manage VM server group permission requests

To approve or reject a VM server group permission request, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the permission request item of the VM Server Group whose request you want to approve from the VM Server Group list. The displayed number indicates the number of permission requests. The VM Server Group Permission Request Approval popup window opens.
  4. VM Server Group Permission Request Approval In the popup window, click the request you want to approve or reject.
  5. After entering your comment, click the Approve or Reject button.
Note
A comment is required to reject a permission request.

View VM Server Group Permission Approval History

To view the VM server group permission request approval history, follow these steps.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deploy Target > VM Server Group menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the VM server group you want to view from the list. You will be taken to the VM Server Group Details page.
  4. On the VM Server Group Details page, click the Approval History tab.

Disable firewall on VM server

SSH method

SSH-based VM deployment uses Secure Shell (Secure SHell, SSH) to deploy directly from Jenkins → Target VM server.

Reference

Firewall exemption information for deployment

  • Source IP: Jenkins IP selected when configuring the pipeline
  • Target IP: IP of the VM server to be deployed

To disable the firewall, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the Firewall Application Guide link. The Firewall Application Guide popup window opens.
  4. Jenkins firewall information is displayed.
    • These details are displayed as the information entered when registering the Jenkins tool, and if no input was provided during tool registration, they may appear as empty values.
    • If needed, contact the tool administrator.

Agent-based approach

Agent-based VM deployment requires the agent to run on the target VM server. The running agent collects information from the DevOps Console and proceeds with the deployment.

Note
Firewall exception information for deployment
  • Source IP: IP of the VM server to be deployed
  • Target IP: DevOps Console IP, (if using Rollback) Rollback Artifact Repository IP
  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. Click the Deployment Target > VM Server Group menu in the left menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the Agent Installation Guide link. The Agent Installation Guide popup will open.
  4. The DevOps Console firewall details, User Guide shortcut, and Agent file download links are displayed.

Integrate Agent

Agent-based VM deployment requires the agent to run on the target VM server. The running agent collects information from the DevOps Console and performs the deployment.

Preparation before agent integration

VM Server Preparation Requirements

Install Java

The agent was written and tested based on Java 8. Install a Java 8 or higher version on the target VM server.

Disable firewall and edit hosts file

The agent collects deployment execution information from the DevOps Console using the REST API, so communication on port 8443 from the Target VM where the agent runs to the DevOps Console is required.

Additionally, when using Rollback, communication with the Rollback Artifact Repository is also required.

If necessary, you may need to disable the firewall or register entries in the hosts file. Refer to the Agent Installation Guide(Agent Method) popup in the DevOps Console for firewall information.

DevOps Console Prerequisites

Prepare authentication key

Target VM server requires agent authentication when the agent runs. Generate a user authentication key and a secret key for authentication. (Manage authentication keys)

Prepare VM server Secret Key

When executing the agent on the target VM server, a Secret Key is required to authorize the VM server that corresponds to the agent.

When adding an agent-type VM server group or VM server, a VM server Secret Key is automatically generated. It can also be viewed later on the VM Server Details page.

Reference
When integrating the agent, not only the entered Secret Key but also the VM server’s actual OS name and IP (IPv4) must match the information registered in the DevOps Console for the integration to work.

Run the agent

Download the agent file

Agent Installation Guide You can download the agent executable from the popup window.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. In the left menu, click the Deploy Target > VM Server Group menu. You will be taken to the VM Server Group page.
  3. On the VM Server Group page, click the Agent Installation Guide link. The Agent Installation Guide popup will open.
  4. Agent Installation Guide In the popup window, click the Agent File Download button.
  5. The deploy-agent.jar file is downloaded.

Run the agent directly

To run the agent on the target VM server, follow these steps.

  1. Create a directory on the target VM server.
  2. Move the deploy-agent.jar file to the target directory.
  3. Refer to the Usage below and run the agent.
    Color mode
    usage: java -jar deploy-agent.jar -A <arg> -L <arg> [-P <arg>] -S <arg> -V <arg>
     -A,--accessKey <arg>               AccessKey for HMAC
     -L,--serverUrl <arg>               Api server url
     -P,--loggingConfigFilePath <arg>   Path to the property file with 'java.util.logging' settings
     -S,--secretKey <arg>               SecretKey for HMAC
     -V,--vmSecretKey <arg>             VM SecretKey
    usage: java -jar deploy-agent.jar -A <arg> -L <arg> [-P <arg>] -S <arg> -V <arg>
     -A,--accessKey <arg>               AccessKey for HMAC
     -L,--serverUrl <arg>               Api server url
     -P,--loggingConfigFilePath <arg>   Path to the property file with 'java.util.logging' settings
     -S,--secretKey <arg>               SecretKey for HMAC
     -V,--vmSecretKey <arg>             VM SecretKey
    Run deployment agent Usage
ItemExplanation
-A, –accessKeyAuthentication key generated with the user authentication key
-L, –serverUrlAPI URL path of the DevOps Console
ex) https://{DEVOPS_CONSOLE_URL}:8443/devops-console-api
-P, –loggingConfigFilePathAgent log file path
If not entered, the {JAVA_HOME}\jre\lib\logging.properties file will be applied.
-S, –secretKeySecret key generated using the user authentication key
-V, –vmSecretKeySecret key generated on the VM server
Table. Direct Agent Execution Option Items

Running the Agent Using a Script File

To run the agent on the target VM server using a script, follow these steps.

  1. Create a directory on the target VM server.
  2. Move the deploy-agent.jar file to the specified directory.
  3. Create the file by referring to the sample execution script below.
  4. Modify the information of the sample execution script.
    • DC_URL, ACCESS_KEY, SECRET_KEY, VM_SECRET_KEY
  5. Run the script.

Linux sample script

Linux sample script
Color mode
#!/bin/sh

JAVA_EXE="java"
DC_URL="https://devops-console-url.com:8443/devops-console-api"
ACCESS_KEY="user-access-key"
SECRET_KEY="user-secret-key"
VM_SECRET_KEY="vm-secret-key"

start()
{
  [ -f deploy-agent.jar ] || { echo "ERROR: deploy-agent.jar file does not exist."; exit 1; }
  echo "Starting Deploy Agent..."
  $JAVA_EXE -jar deploy-agent.jar -A $ACCESS_KEY -S $SECRET_KEY -V $VM_SECRET_KEY -L $DC_URL > deploy-agent.log 2>&1 &
  PID=`ps aux | grep 'java -jar deploy-agent.jar' | grep '\-A' | grep '\-S' | grep '\-V' | grep '\-L' | awk '{print $2}'`
  echo "Process ID : $PID"
  echo $PID > deploy-agent.pid
  echo "Done."
}
stop()
{
  echo "Shutdown Deploy Agent..."
  ps aux | grep 'java -jar deploy-agent.jar' | grep '\-A' | grep '\-S' | grep '\-V' | grep '\-L' | awk '{print $2}' | xargs kill
  echo "Done."
}

case "$1" in
  start)
    start
    ;;
  stop)
    stop
    ;;
  restart)
    stop
    start
    ;;
  *)
    echo $ "Usage: $0 {start|stop|restart}"
    exit 1
    ;;
esac
exit 0
#!/bin/sh

JAVA_EXE="java"
DC_URL="https://devops-console-url.com:8443/devops-console-api"
ACCESS_KEY="user-access-key"
SECRET_KEY="user-secret-key"
VM_SECRET_KEY="vm-secret-key"

start()
{
  [ -f deploy-agent.jar ] || { echo "ERROR: deploy-agent.jar file does not exist."; exit 1; }
  echo "Starting Deploy Agent..."
  $JAVA_EXE -jar deploy-agent.jar -A $ACCESS_KEY -S $SECRET_KEY -V $VM_SECRET_KEY -L $DC_URL > deploy-agent.log 2>&1 &
  PID=`ps aux | grep 'java -jar deploy-agent.jar' | grep '\-A' | grep '\-S' | grep '\-V' | grep '\-L' | awk '{print $2}'`
  echo "Process ID : $PID"
  echo $PID > deploy-agent.pid
  echo "Done."
}
stop()
{
  echo "Shutdown Deploy Agent..."
  ps aux | grep 'java -jar deploy-agent.jar' | grep '\-A' | grep '\-S' | grep '\-V' | grep '\-L' | awk '{print $2}' | xargs kill
  echo "Done."
}

case "$1" in
  start)
    start
    ;;
  stop)
    stop
    ;;
  restart)
    stop
    start
    ;;
  *)
    echo $ "Usage: $0 {start|stop|restart}"
    exit 1
    ;;
esac
exit 0
Linux sample script

Windows sample script

Windows sample script
Color mode
@ECHO OFF

SET JAVA_EXE="java"
SET DC_URL="https://devops-console-url.com:8443/devops-console-api"
SET ACCESS_KEY="user-access-key"
SET SECRET_KEY="user-secret-key"
SET VM_SECRET_KEY="vm-secret-key"

IF NOT EXIST deploy-agent.jar (
    ECHO "ERROR: deploy-agent.jar file does not exist."
    EXIT /b 0
)
ECHO "Starting Deploy Agent..."
%JAVA_EXE% -jar deploy-agent.jar -A %ACCESS_KEY% -S %SECRET_KEY% -V %VM_SECRET_KEY% -L %DC_URL%

EXIT /b 0
@ECHO OFF

SET JAVA_EXE="java"
SET DC_URL="https://devops-console-url.com:8443/devops-console-api"
SET ACCESS_KEY="user-access-key"
SET SECRET_KEY="user-secret-key"
SET VM_SECRET_KEY="vm-secret-key"

IF NOT EXIST deploy-agent.jar (
    ECHO "ERROR: deploy-agent.jar file does not exist."
    EXIT /b 0
)
ECHO "Starting Deploy Agent..."
%JAVA_EXE% -jar deploy-agent.jar -A %ACCESS_KEY% -S %SECRET_KEY% -V %VM_SECRET_KEY% -L %DC_URL%

EXIT /b 0
Windows sample script

Notice
  • It can be executed on java 8 or later.
  • Assume the jar file execution location is {WORKSPACE}.
  • Additional directories such as backup and logs are created in {WORKSPACE}.
  • If you do not specify -loggingConfigFilePath, the {JAVA_HOME}\jre\lib\logging.properties file will be used.
  • Deployment-related files are stored under {WORKSPACE}/backup.
  • Only the most recent 3 successfully deployed files are retained.
  • deploy-agent.jar full logs are not saved automatically. Only deployment-related logs from the full logs are saved to {WORKSPACE}/logs.
  • Logs are retained for 30 days.

Agent problem solving

Changing the log level

If needed, you can change the agent log level. Refer to the sample log file below and add the -P, --loggingConfigFilePath options.

Sample log file

Color mode
############################################################
#      Default Logging Configuration File
#
# You can use a different file by specifying a filename
# with the java.util.logging.config.file system property.
# For example java -Djava.util.logging.config.file=myfile
############################################################

############################################################
#      Global properties
############################################################

# "handlers" specifies a comma separated list of log Handler
# classes.  These handlers will be installed during VM startup.
# Note that these classes must be on the system classpath.
# By default we only configure a ConsoleHandler, which will only
# show messages at the INFO and above levels.
handlers= java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler

# To also add the FileHandler, use the following line instead.
#handlers= java.util.logging.FileHandler, java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler

# Default global logging level.
# This specifies which kinds of events are logged across
# all loggers.  For any given facility this global level
# can be overriden by a facility specific level
# Note that the ConsoleHandler also has a separate level
# setting to limit messages printed to the console.
#.level= INFO
.level= FINE

############################################################
# Handler specific properties.
# Describes specific configuration info for Handlers.
############################################################

# default file output is in user's home directory.
java.util.logging.FileHandler.pattern = %h/java%u.log
java.util.logging.FileHandler.limit = 50000
java.util.logging.FileHandler.count = 1
java.util.logging.FileHandler.formatter = java.util.logging.XMLFormatter

# Limit the message that are printed on the console to INFO and above.
#java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.level = INFO
java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.level = FINE
java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.formatter = java.util.logging.SimpleFormatter

# Example to customize the SimpleFormatter output format
# to print one-line log message like this:
#     <level>: <log message> [<date/time>]
#
# java.util.logging.SimpleFormatter.format=%4$s: %5$s [%1$tc]%n

############################################################
# Facility specific properties.
# Provides extra control for each logger.
############################################################

# For example, set the com.xyz.foo logger to only log SEVERE
# messages:
com.xyz.foo.level = SEVERE
############################################################
#      Default Logging Configuration File
#
# You can use a different file by specifying a filename
# with the java.util.logging.config.file system property.
# For example java -Djava.util.logging.config.file=myfile
############################################################

############################################################
#      Global properties
############################################################

# "handlers" specifies a comma separated list of log Handler
# classes.  These handlers will be installed during VM startup.
# Note that these classes must be on the system classpath.
# By default we only configure a ConsoleHandler, which will only
# show messages at the INFO and above levels.
handlers= java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler

# To also add the FileHandler, use the following line instead.
#handlers= java.util.logging.FileHandler, java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler

# Default global logging level.
# This specifies which kinds of events are logged across
# all loggers.  For any given facility this global level
# can be overriden by a facility specific level
# Note that the ConsoleHandler also has a separate level
# setting to limit messages printed to the console.
#.level= INFO
.level= FINE

############################################################
# Handler specific properties.
# Describes specific configuration info for Handlers.
############################################################

# default file output is in user's home directory.
java.util.logging.FileHandler.pattern = %h/java%u.log
java.util.logging.FileHandler.limit = 50000
java.util.logging.FileHandler.count = 1
java.util.logging.FileHandler.formatter = java.util.logging.XMLFormatter

# Limit the message that are printed on the console to INFO and above.
#java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.level = INFO
java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.level = FINE
java.util.logging.ConsoleHandler.formatter = java.util.logging.SimpleFormatter

# Example to customize the SimpleFormatter output format
# to print one-line log message like this:
#     <level>: <log message> [<date/time>]
#
# java.util.logging.SimpleFormatter.format=%4$s: %5$s [%1$tc]%n

############################################################
# Facility specific properties.
# Provides extra control for each logger.
############################################################

# For example, set the com.xyz.foo logger to only log SEVERE
# messages:
com.xyz.foo.level = SEVERE
Sample log file

If the IP is not recognized

When integrating the agent, not only the entered Secret Key but also the VM server’s actual OS name and IP (IPv4) must match the information registered in the DevOps Console for the integration to work.

For VM servers with some multi-network devices installed, the agent may fail to recognize the IP correctly. In such cases, add the IP and hostname settings to the /etc/hosts file as shown below.

hostname verification procedure
Figure. hostname verification procedure

2.10.3 - Request Permission

You can request permission to use the K8S clusters, namespaces, and VM server groups managed as deployment targets in the DevOps Console.

Getting Started with Permission Request

To begin the permission request, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deployment Target > Permission Request menu. The Permission Request screen appears.

Apply for K8S cluster permissions

To apply for K8S cluster permissions, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deployment Target > Permission Request menu. The Permission Request screen appears.
  3. On the Permission Request screen, click the K8S Cluster tab. The K8S Cluster screen appears.
  4. On the K8S Cluster screen, click the Apply button. The K8S Cluster Permission Request popup window opens.
  5. K8S Cluster Permission Request Search for the K8S cluster to request permission in the popup window.
  6. Enter the reason for the application and click the Add button.
  7. After selecting the permissions for the added K8S cluster, click the Save button.

Cancel K8S cluster permission request

To cancel a K8S cluster permission request, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deployment Target > Permission Request menu. The Permission Request screen appears.
  3. On the Permission Request screen, click the K8S Cluster tab. The K8S Cluster screen appears.
  4. On the K8S cluster screen, select a cluster and click the Cancel button.
Note
Only requests with status REQUESTED display the Cancel button.

Apply for namespace permission

To request namespace permissions, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deployment Target > Permission Request menu. The Permission Request screen appears.
  3. On the Permission Request screen, click the Namespace tab. The Namespace screen appears.
  4. On the Namespace screen, click the Apply button. The Namespace Permission Request popup opens.
  5. Namespace Permission Request In the popup, search for the K8S cluster that contains the namespace for which you are requesting permission.
  6. Select a namespace, enter the request reason, and then click the Add button.
  7. After selecting the permissions for the added namespace, click the Save button.

Cancel namespace permission request

To cancel a namespace permission request, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deployment Target > Permission Request menu. The Permission Request screen appears.
  3. On the Permission Request screen, click the Namespace tab. The Namespace screen appears.
  4. On the Namespace screen, select a namespace and click the Cancel button.
Note
Only applications with status REQUESTED display the Cancel button.

Apply for VM server group permission

To apply for VM server group permissions, follow the steps below.

  1. Main page, click the Admin icon at the top right. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deployment Target > Permission Request menu. The Permission Request screen appears.
  3. On the Permission Request screen, click the VM Server Group tab. The VM Server Group screen appears.
  4. On the VM Server Group screen, click the Apply button. The VM Server Group Permission Request popup opens.
  5. VM Server Group Permission Request Search for the VM server group for which you want to request permission in the popup window.
  6. Enter the reason for application and click the Add button.
  7. After selecting the permissions for the added VM server group, click the Save button.

Cancel VM server group permission request

To cancel the VM server group permission request, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Admin icon at the top right of the Main page. You will be taken to the Tenant Dashboard page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Deployment Target > Permission Request menu. The Permission Request screen appears.
  3. On the Permission Request screen, click the VM Server Group tab. The VM Server Group screen appears.
  4. VM server group on the screen, select the VM server group and click the Cancel button.
Reference
Only applications with status REQUESTED display the Cancel button.

2.11 - Release Management

2.11.1 - Release Management

A release is a task that performs the actual deployment process using a workflow.
Users with Owner, Master, or higher permissions within a project group can configure and apply a release process appropriate for the project.

Getting Started with Release Management

To start release management, follow the steps below.

  1. Main page, click the Release Management icon next to the project group name. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Release Management > Release Management menu. You will be taken to the Release Management page.

Create Release

Release creation proceeds in the following order.

Progress Order
Enter basic information - Configure workflow - Review/edit task - Configure release - Review summary information

Pre-release checklist

Before creating a release, verify the following items.

Item
Required
Explanation
WorkflowYThe workflow must be created as a release process template before creating a release.
Please refer to Workflow Management.
Approval templateNYou can preconfigure the approval line and approval content to be used in a release in the approval template.
Please refer to Approval Template Settings.
Table. Pre-release checklist

Getting Started with Release Creation

Start creating a release on the Release Management screen

To create a release, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Release Management icon next to the project group name. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  2. From the left menu, click the Release Management > Release Management menu. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  3. Click the Create Release button.

Start creating a release from the workflow list

To create a release, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Release Management icon next to the project group name. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  2. Click the Release Management > Workflow Management menu in the left menu.
  3. In the Workflow list, click the More icon. In the More menu, click the Release with this workflow option.

Start creating a release from the workflow detail screen

To create a release, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Release Management icon next to the project group name. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  2. On the Release Management page, click the Release Management > Workflow Management menu in the left menu.
  3. In the workflow list, click the workflow you want to view in detail.
  4. On the Workflow Details screen, click the Release with this workflow menu.

Enter basic release information

Enter the basic release information.

  1. Click the Start button.

Workflow Settings

  1. Select the workflow to perform the release. If you started creating a release through Workflow Management, the corresponding workflow is automatically selected.
  2. If you set an environment variable in the workflow, verify the variable and modify its value.
  3. Click the Next button.

Task view/edit

  1. Check the tasks that will be performed in the release.
  2. Edit or delete the task as needed.
  3. If you have completed checking/editing all tasks, click the Next button.

Release Settings

  1. Add the person responsible for receiving email/messenger notifications when the release or task status changes.
  2. Select whether to automatically end the release when all tasks are completed.
  3. Click the Next button.

Summary information

  1. Check the release creation summary information and click the Done button.
  2. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the creation.
  3. When the release creation is complete, the Release Details screen appears.

Release Detail Lookup

To view release details, follow these steps.

  1. In the Release list, click the release you want to view in detail.
  2. The Release Details screen appears.

Proceed with Release

Ongoing release

To proceed with the release, follow the steps below.

  1. In the Release list, click the release card with status In Progress.
  2. Release Details The screen appears.
  3. You can execute the release tasks included in the release.

Proceed with task

Only the person assigned to the release task or the release manager registered when the release is created can proceed with the task. To proceed with the release task, follow the steps below.

  1. If you are the task owner or the release owner, click the Task card. The task information appears in the task edit screen on the right.
  2. Pre-task Editing: You can edit some items of the task before it starts. After completing the edits, click the Apply button.
    taskEditable items
    UserEstimated time required
    - Description
    - Person in charge
    - Receive email upon completion
    - Attachment
    JenkinsParameters
    - Person in charge
    - Email recipient upon completion
    Blue/Green transitionPerson in charge
    - mail recipient upon completion
    Image repository replicationSource tag
    - Target tag
    - Person in charge
    - Email recipient upon completion
    SCM repository releaseSCM tag
    - person in charge
    - email recipient upon completion
    Create a GIT branchProject
    - Repository branch
    - New branch
    - Person in charge
    - Email recipient upon completion
    Internal approvalJIRA Version Issue
    - Approver
    - Approval Title
    - Approval Content
    - Assignee
    - Email Recipient on Completion
    Helm releaseSET VALUES
    - Person in charge
    - Receive email upon completion
    JIRA releaseJIRA Project
    - JIRA Version
    - Assignee
    - Receive email upon completion
    Table. Items that can be edited before starting the task
  3. Task Start: Click the Start button to begin the task. If Task Auto-Run is selected, the task will start automatically without clicking the Start button.
  4. Task in progress: While the task is in progress, the status bar at the top of the task is displayed as In progress.
Note
If a task is in progress, all tasks except the User task cannot be edited.
However, for a User task, you can still modify the estimated time, description, attachments, and other details even while it is in progress.
  1. Task Completion: Click the Complete button to complete the task. Some tasks cannot be completed by the user clicking the Complete button; the system automatically checks the status and completes them.
  2. Proceed with the other tasks in the same way and complete them.

Pause/Restart/Skip Task

Only the person assigned to the task or the release manager registered when creating the release can pause, restart, or skip.

To stop, restart, or skip a task, follow these steps.

  1. If you are the task owner or the release owner, click the More icon of the task.
  2. In the More menu, click the Stop/Restart/Skip menu.
Note
Depending on the task’s status, some menus may be unavailable.

Complete the release

The release manager can complete the release. The final outcome of a release is classified into three categories: success, failure, or stop.

  • Success: After all release tasks are completed, the release manager marks the release as successful.
  • Failure: After all release tasks are completed, the release manager marked the release as failed.
  • Stop: There is at least one incomplete task in the release, but the release manager stopped the release.

Complete the release as success/failure

To complete the release, follow the steps below.

  1. Click the Release card with status In Progress in the Release list.
  2. Release Details screen appears.
  3. Confirm that all tasks included in the release have been completed.
  4. Click the ””Release Complete”” button.
  5. Release Complete popup appears, select Release Result (Success/Failure) and click the Complete button to finish the release.

Stop the release

To stop without completing the release, follow these steps.

However, according to the Release Management of the tenant common settings, approval is required when stopping.(테넌트 공통설정 관리하기)

  1. From the Release list, click the release card with status In Progress.
  2. The Release Details screen appears.
  3. Confirm that none of the tasks included in the release are in progress, and that any remaining tasks have not been started.
  4. Click the Release Complete button.
  5. Release Complete popup opens, and the release result is displayed as Interrupted. Click the Complete button to stop the release.
  6. If you set approval required on stop in the tenant common settings, clicking the Release Complete button opens the Release Stop Approval popup.

Delete release history

If the release status is success/failure/aborted, you can delete the release history. Releases in progress cannot be deleted.

Note that the delete function may not be visible depending on the Release Management setting in the tenant common settings. (Manage Tenant Common Settings)

To delete the release history, follow these steps.

  1. To delete the release history, use one of the following methods.
    1. On the Release Details screen, click the Delete button.
    2. Click the More icon in the release list. In the More menu, click the Delete menu.
  2. Delete Release History popup appears, and please enter the release name to confirm deletion.
  3. Click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

2.11.2 - Workflow Management

A workflow is a collection of tasks and task groups of various types, and it must be configured before creating a release.
A workflow is a release process template that helps by turning a series of tasks required for the build-to-deployment stages into tasks, assigning owners to each task, and enabling sequential task execution during deployment.

Getting Started with Workflow Management

To begin workflow management, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Release Management icon next to the project group name. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  2. Release Management page, click the Release Management > Workflow Management menu. The Workflow Management page appears.

Create workflow

Start Creating a Workflow

To create a workflow, follow the steps below.

  1. Workflow Management page, click the Create Workflow button. The Create Workflow popup opens.
  2. Workflow Creation Enter the information in the popup window, select the project to be released via the workflow, and click the Start button. You will be taken to the Workflow Creation page.
  3. Edit the workflow on the Create Workflow screen.

Edit basic information

To modify the workflow’s basic information, follow these steps.

  1. On the Create Workflow screen, click the Edit Basic Information button. The Edit Basic Information popup opens.
  2. Edit Basic Information In the popup window, edit the information and click the Save button.
  3. Save Confirmation when the popup opens, click the Confirm button to complete the edit.

Modify Environment Variables

You can manage variable values that are available throughout the entire workflow by using workflow environment variables.

Follow these steps to modify the workflow environment variables.

  1. On the Create Workflow screen, click the Edit Environment Variables button. The Edit Environment Variables popup opens.
  2. Edit Environment Variables Edit the environment variables in the popup window.
    1. Click the Add button to add an environment variable.
    2. Enter key/value.
    3. Click the X icon to delete the environment variable.
  3. After completing the environment variable edit, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the edit.

Add Task

To add a task in the workflow, follow these steps.

  1. On the Create Workflow screen, add a task using one of the following methods.
    1. Click the Task button to add a task at the very bottom of the workflow.
    2. Click the task header to add a task above the current task.
    3. Click the bottom of the task to add a task below the current task.
  2. Set the task in the task editing screen on the right.
  3. Click the Apply button to apply the task to the workflow.
    ItemExplanation
    Add taskAdd a task.
    Add task at the topAdd a task at the top.
    Add task at the bottomAdd a task at the bottom.
    Task editingEdit the selected task.
    Table. Workflow creation screen items
Information
For detailed information about tasks you can add, refer to the 태스크.

Add task group

By using task groups, you can manage the execution (sequential or parallel) of related tasks and their prerequisites.

To add a task group in a workflow, follow these steps.

  1. On the Create Workflow screen, click the Task Group button.
  2. Click the generated new task group card.
  3. In the task group edit screen on the right, set the task group and click the Apply button.
    ItemExplanation
    Add task groupAdd a task group.
    Task groupClick to display the task group edit screen.
    Task group namePlease enter the task group name.
    Task in progressSelect the task execution mode within the task group
    • Parallel: Execute tasks in the group simultaneously.
    • Sequential: Execute tasks in the group sequentially.
    Conditional executionSelect whether to use the execution condition for the task group.
    - ON: Set the task group execution according to the status of preceding tasks.
    - OFF: The task group’s tasks run regardless of the status of preceding tasks.
    Predecessor task status for task group executionExecute the current task group when the selected preceding task is in the specified state.
    If multiple preceding tasks are selected, it operates as an AND condition.
    Receive email upon completionSearch for and enter the recipient to receive an email when the task completes successfully
    • Email recipients can be searched among project group members.
    Table. Workflow task group additional items

Edit task, task group

To edit tasks and task groups in a workflow, follow these steps.

  1. Click the Task, Task Group cards you want to edit in the workflow.
  2. The Task, Task Group Edit screen appears on the right.
  3. After completing the editing of tasks and task groups, click the Apply button to apply the tasks and task groups to the workflow.

Delete task, task group

To delete tasks and task groups in a workflow, follow these steps.

  1. In the workflow, click the Task, Task Group card you want to edit. The Task, Task Group Edit screen appears on the right.
  2. On the Task, Task Group Edit screen, click the Delete button.
  3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion of the task and task group.

Complete workflow creation

To complete workflow creation after adding tasks and task groups to the workflow, follow these steps.

  1. On the Workflow Creation screen, click the Save button. The Workflow Save popup opens.
  2. In the Save Workflow popup, click the Confirm button to complete workflow creation.

Workflow Detail View

To view the workflow in detail, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Workflow Management page, click the workflow you want to view in detail.
  2. The Workflow Details screen appears.

Modify workflow

To modify the workflow, follow these steps.

  1. To display the workflow edit screen, use one of the following methods.
    1. On the Workflow Details screen, click the Edit button.
    2. On the Workflow List screen, click the More icon. In the More menu, click the Edit menu.
  2. On the Workflow Edit screen, edit the workflow. Editing is the same as Create Workflow.
  3. After completing the workflow edit, click the Save button. The Workflow Save popup opens.
  4. In the Workflow Save popup, click the Confirm button to complete editing the workflow.

Delete workflow

To delete a workflow, follow the steps below.

  1. To delete a workflow, use one of the following methods.
    1. On the Workflow Details screen, click the Delete button.
    2. On the Workflow List screen, click the More icon. From the More menu, click the Delete menu.
  2. When the Workflow Deletion popup opens, please enter the workflow name to confirm deletion.
  3. In the Workflow Delete popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

Replicate workflow

You can duplicate a workflow to create a new workflow.

To duplicate the workflow, follow these steps.

  1. On the Workflow List screen, click the More icon. In the More menu, click the Clone this workflow menu. The Workflow Clone popup opens.
  2. Workflow duplication Enter the information in the popup window and click the Start button. Workflow creation screen appears.
  3. On the Workflow Creation screen, edit the workflow. Editing is the same as Create Workflow.
  4. On the Create Workflow screen, after completing the edit, click the Save button.
  5. In the Save Workflow popup, click the Confirm button to complete workflow creation.

Create a Release with a Workflow

Note
For detailed information on creating a release, see Getting Started with Release Management.

On the Workflow Management screen, you can create a new release.

To create a release using a workflow, follow these steps.

  1. To create a release with a workflow, use one of the following methods.
    • On the Workflow Details screen, click the Release with this workflow button.
    • On the Workflow List screen, click the More icon. In the More menu, click the Release with this workflow menu.
  2. Create Release screen appears, and you can create a release.

2.11.3 - Approval Template Settings

The approval template can be used in workflows and releases, and it includes an approval line and approval content.

ItemExplanation
Approval lineYou can predefine frequently used approval lines.
Approval contentYou can already set up frequently used approval content.
Table. Approval Template Provided Items

Getting Started with Approval Template Configuration

To begin setting up the approval template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Main page, click the Release Management icon next to the project group name. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  2. On the Release Management page, click the Release Management > Approval Template Settings menu in the left menu.

Approval line

Getting Started with Approval Line

To start using the approval line, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Release Management icon next to the project group name. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  2. On the Release Management page, click the Release Management > Approval Template Settings menu in the left menu. The Approval Template Settings screen appears.
  3. On the Approval Template Settings screen, click the Approval Line tab.

Add approval line template

To add an internal approval line template, follow the steps below.

You can create an approval line for users who are Owners or Masters within the project group via the internal approval line.

  1. On the Approval Template Settings screen, click the Internal Approval Line tab. The Internal Approval Line screen appears.
  2. On the Internal approval line screen, click the Add button. The Add approval line template popup opens.
  3. Add Approval Line Template Enter the information in the popup window and click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    Template namePlease enter the template name.
    Approval OfficerSearch for the approver and add them to the approval line.
    • Only project group members can be searched and added as approvers.
    Approval editing
    • Change of approval, agreement, and notification
    • Change approval order
    • Delete approver
    Table. Additional Input Items for Approval Line Template

Approval Line Details

To view the approval line in detail, follow these steps.

  1. Internal approval line screen: click the approval line you want to view in detail.
  2. Approval Line Details screen appears.

Edit approval line

To modify the approval line, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Internal approval line screen, click the approval line you want to edit. The Approval line details screen will appear.
  2. On the Approval Line Details screen, click the Edit button. The Edit Approval Line screen appears.
  3. On the Edit Approval Line screen, after completing the approval line modification, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the edit.

Delete Approval Line

To delete the approval line, follow these steps.

  1. To delete an approval line, use one of the following methods.
    • On the Approval Line Details screen, click the Delete button.
    • In the Approval line list, select the approval line you wish to delete, then click the Delete button.
  2. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

Manage approval content

Getting Started with Approval Content

To start using the approval content, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Main page, click the Release Management icon next to the project group name. You will be taken to the Release Management page.
  2. Release Management page, click the Release Management > Approval Template Settings menu in the left menu. The Approval Template Settings screen appears.
  3. Approval Template Settings on the screen, click the Approval Content tab.

Create approval content template

To add an approval content template, follow these steps.

  1. On the Approval Template Settings screen, click the Approval Content tab. The Approval Content screen appears.
  2. On the Approval Content screen, click the Add button. The Add Approval Content Template popup opens.
  3. Add approval content template Enter the information in the popup window and click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the addition.

View approval details

To view the approval details in detail, follow these steps.

  1. On the Approval Content screen, click the approval item you wish to view in detail.
  2. Approval Details screen appears.

Modify approval content

To edit the approval content, follow the steps below.

  1. On the Approval Content screen, click the approval content you want to edit.
  2. When the Approval Details screen appears, click the Edit button. The Edit Approval Details screen appears.
  3. On the Edit Approval Content screen, after completing the approval content edit, click the Save button.
  4. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the edit.

Delete approval content

To delete the approval content, follow the steps below.

  1. To delete the approval content, use one of the following methods.
    • On the Approval Details screen, click the Delete button.
    • On the Approval Content List screen, select the approval content you want to delete and click the Delete button.
  2. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete the deletion.

2.11.4 - Task

A task is the smallest executable unit that composes a workflow (or release), and each task can perform its designated operation.
A workflow (or release) consists of one or more tasks.

You can add and edit tasks from Release Management, Workflow Management.

Task List

The tasks provided in release management are as follows.

item
Explanation
JenkinsYou can run it by integrating with a Jenkins pipeline that belongs to the DevOps Console project or a Jenkins job that is separate from the DevOps Console project.
UserYou can register tasks that users perform manually, rather than integrating with a specific tool.
Blue/Green switchYou can integrate with Blue/Green deployments that belong to the DevOps Console project.
Internal approvalYou can approve through a USER belonging to the DevOps Console project group.
Helm releaseYou can integrate with Helm releases belonging to the DevOps Console project.
Image repository replicationYou can replicate the image to another repository.
SCM repository releaseRelease using the SCM repository’s release feature.
Create a Git branchYou can copy a specific branch of a repository belonging to the DevOps Console project and create a new branch.
JIRA releaseYou can release or unrelease a specific version in a JIRA project.
VM deploymentThis task can deploy a VM deployment group that is in the Build Completed state, or roll back to a previous version.
Table. Project Creation Basic Information Input Items

Common task items

You can add and edit tasks in workload (or release) management. When you select a task, the Task Edit screen appears, and the Task Edit screen is composed as follows.

ItemExplanation
Task namePlease enter the task name.
Task typePlease select the task type.
Auto-runSelect whether to run automatically after the preceding task is completed.
  • ON: The task starts automatically when the preceding task is completed.
  • OFF: The task owner clicks Start to begin the task.
Conditional executionSelect whether to allow the current task to run based on the status of the preceding task (success/failure/skip).
  • If the preceding task’s execution condition is met: the current task can proceed (start/complete).
  • If the preceding task’s execution condition is not met: the current task cannot proceed and will automatically become skip state.
Conditional execution item
  1. It is displayed when conditional execution is ON.
  2. Select the preceding task and check the appropriate option among on success/on failure/skip as the execution condition.
  3. Click the Add button to add a preceding task execution condition.
  4. Each condition is combined with AND to determine satisfaction or failure.
person in chargeSearch for and enter the personnel who will perform the task among the members of the project group.
  • The assignee can be searched among the project group members.
Assign yourself as the person in chargeClick to set the current task’s assignee to yourself.
Receive email upon completionSearch for and enter the recipient who will receive an email when the task is completed.
  • Email recipients can be searched among project group members.
DeleteDelete the current task.
ApplyApply the current task settings to the workflow.
Table. Task Common Items

Jenkins task

This is a task that can run a build pipeline added to the project or a Jenkins Job not registered in the DevOps Console.

ItemExplanation
Jenkins TypeSelect Jenkins Type
  • Project: Executes the build pipeline added to the project.
  • User Input: The user directly enters a Jenkins job not registered in the DevOps Console and runs it.
ProjectPlease select the project to run the pipeline.
Jenkins URLSelect the URL of the Jenkins tool registered for the chosen project.
JobSelect a job from the selected Jenkins URL.
Jobs that the current user has permission to run are displayed in the list.
ParameterEnter the parameters required to run the build pipeline
  • If a parameter is needed when building a Job, a screen will appear where you can view and edit the parameter.
  • You can enter a value directly or select an environment variable to use. For environment variables, refer to 환경변수 수정하기.
Jenkins Job URLEnter the URL of a Jenkins Job that is not registered in the DevOps Console.
Jenkins ID
Jenkins Password or Token
  1. Enter the ID and Password or Token to use for running the Jenkins job.
  2. After entering, click the Connection Test button to verify that the entered Jenkins Job URL connects properly.
  3. If a parameter is required when building the job, the parameter will be displayed; check and modify the required parameter.
Table. Jenkins task items

User Task

This task registers cases where the user has work that must be performed manually.

Itemdescription
Estimated timePlease enter the estimated time required for the User task.
ExplanationEnter the tasks that the responsible person must perform according to the manual.
Table. User task items

Blue/Green transition task

This is a task that can be integrated with the project’s Blue/Green deployment.

ItemExplanation
ProjectSelect the project to perform the blue-green transition.
Blue‑green listSelect the bluegreen you want to run in the task from the list of bluegreens in the selected project.
Table. Blue/Green transition task items

If the Blue/Green switch task is performed during a release, you can carry out the following actions.

ItemExplanation
Check operational statusClick the Check operation status button to open the Blue/Green operation status check popup.
ConversionCheck the status of operation/operation standby and click the Switch button.
Operation and operation standby will be switched.
CompletedCheck the blue/green transition result and click the Complete button to complete the blue/green task.
If there is a problem with the transition, you can click the Check operation status button to revert to the previous state.
Table. Possible task items in Blue/Green transition

Internal approval task

This task enables approval by a USER who belongs to the project group.

Item
Explanation
Include JIRA version issuesSelect whether to include JIRA Version issues in the approval content.
When proceeding with a release, select the JIRA Version set in the project group; the list of all issues corresponding to that Version will be automatically added to the approval text.
JIRA ProjectSelect a JIRA Project.
JIRA Project you can select from the JIRA Projects that have been registered.
Approval line templateSelect the approval line you added in Approval Template Settings and add approvers in bulk.
ApproverSearch for the approver and add them.
You can search for members of the project group and add them.
Approver ListModify the approver list by changing the approval type, adjusting the order, or deleting entries.
Approval content templateSelect the approval content added from Manage Approval Content and add a title and description.
Approval contentEnter the approval title and approval content.
Table. Internal Approval Task Items

When the internal approval task runs in a release, you can perform the following actions.

  • Approver: Can approve or reject the approval.
    • Approval: Click the Approve button. In the Approve confirmation popup, enter the approval comments and click the Confirm button to approve the document.
    • Reject Approval: Click the Reject button. In the Reject confirmation popup, enter your approval comments and click the Confirm button to reject the approval.
  • Other roles: You can check the approval status.

Helm release task

This is a task that can be linked with Helm releases belonging to the project.

Item
Explanation
Auto shutdownAfter the Helm release execution is completed, select whether to automatically terminate the task.
projectSelect the project to perform the Helm release.
Helm releaseSelect the Helm release to use in the task during the project’s Kubernetes deployment.
workload, Helm release can be selected.
Information about the selected Helm release is displayed.
SET_VALUES (Helm release)It is displayed when the previously selected Helm release is Helm release.
  1. Click the View icon to check the current Helm release’s values.yaml.
  2. Click the Add button to add a key/value.
  3. Enter the key.
  4. You can either input the value directly or select an environment variable to use it.
    Refer to Modify environment variables for environment variables.
SET_VALUES (workload)If the Helm release selected earlier is a workload, display
  • Check the values used in the last deployment.
  • Enter values for tag, deploy_strategy, and repository.
Table. Helm Release Task Items

When the Helm release task runs in a release, you can view the following information on the task edit screen.

When you select Helm Release, you can view the following items.

ItemExplanation
Current statusDisplays the current Helm release status.
Runtime statusDisplays the result of the Helm release execution.
DetailsDisplays the Helm release history.
View icon can be clicked to check the Values.yaml used in the Helm release by revision.
To roll back to a previous deployment, click the Rollback button. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.
Table. Items displayed for Helm release type

When you select 워크로드, you can see the following items.

ItemExplanation
Runtime statusDisplays the result of the Helm release execution.
DetailsDisplays the deployment history.
To roll back to a previous deployment, click the Rollback button. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button to complete.
Table. Project creation basic information entry items

Image Repository Replication Task

This task can replicate an image to another repository.

Source image → (copy) Target image

Item
Explanation
TypeSelect Type
  • Project: Select the image repository added to the project as Source and Target.
  • User Direct Input: Enter an image repository not registered in the DevOps Console as Source and Target.
Source projectSelect a project with a registered source image repository.
Source image repositorySelect the image repository registered in the Source project.
Source tagEnter the Source tag.
tag can be set by entering a value directly or by selecting an environment variable. Refer to Modify environment variables for environment variables.
Target projectSelect a project where the target image repository is registered.
Target image repositorySelect the image repository registered in the Target project.
Target tagEnter the target tag.
Source HostEnter the Source Host domain name.
Source PathPlease enter the Source Path.
Source ID
Source Password
Enter the account information for the source image repository.
After entering, click the Connection Test button to verify that the connection is successful.
Target HostTarget Host Please enter the domain name.
Target PathPlease enter the target path.
Target ID
Target Password
Enter the account information for the target image repository.
After entering, click the Connection Test button to verify that the connection is successful.
Table. Image Repository Replication Task Items

SCM repository release task

This task executes a release of the SCM repository.

SCM repository releases perform release creation or tag creation depending on the SCM repository tool (GitHub, GitLab, other Git repositories).

ItemExplanation
Git TypeSelect Git Type
  • Project: Select a code repository added to the project.
  • User Input: The user enters a Git repository not registered in the DevOps Console.
projectSelect a project with a registered code repository.
SCM repositorySelect the code repository registered in the project.
SCM branchSelect a branch of the code repository.
SCM tagEnter the tags to create in the release.
Git URLEnter the Git URL.
Git ID
Git Password or Token
Enter your Git account information.
branchEnter the Git branch.
After entering, click the Connection Test button to verify that the connection is successful.
Table. SCM Repository Release Task Items

GIT branch creation task

This is a task that can copy a specific Git branch and create a new branch.

Itemdescription
Git TypeSelect Git Type
  • Project: Select a code repository added to the project.
  • User Input: The user enters a Git repository not registered in the DevOps Console.
projectSelect a project with a registered code repository.
repositorySelect the code repository registered in the project.
branchSelect the existing branch that the newly created branch will reference.
new branchEnter the name of the new branch.
Apply ProtectedSelect whether to apply the protection rule to the newly created branch.
Protection RuleWhen applying a Protection Rule, set the Merge and Push permissions.
  • Select a role that is allowed to Merge.
  • Select a role that is allowed to Push.
Git URLEnter the Git URL.
Git ID
Git Password or Token
Enter your Git account information.
branchEnter the existing branch that the newly created branch will reference.
After entering, click the Connection Test button to verify that the connection is normal.
Table. GIT branch creation task items

JIRA release task

This is a task that can set a specific version of a JIRA project to Released or Unreleased.

ItemExplanation
JIRA projectSelect a JIRA project registered in the project group.
JIRA URLYou can view the Server of the selected JIRA project. (Readonly)
JIRA VersionSelect the Version of the JIRA project
  • Only versions with the Unreleased status can be selected.
Table. JIRA Release Task Items

If a JIRA release task is in progress in the release, you can perform the following actions.

Itemdescription
statusWhen you click the Status button, the JIRA release popup opens.
State changeClick the Change Status button to change the JIRA version to Released, or change it back to Unreleased.
ConfirmConfirm click the button to complete the JIRA release.
Table. Actions that can be performed in JIRA release tasks

VM deployment task

a task that can deploy a VM deployment group in the Build Complete state or roll back to a previous version.

Itemdescription
projectPlease select a project.
deployment groupSelect a deployment group
Deployment group informationThe contents stored in the deployment group are set automatically.
Table. VM Deployment Task Items

2.11.5 - JIRA Project

Users can manage the JIRA project information used in JIRA tasks for release management.

Note
This feature is supported only when the JIRA tool is registered in the system.

Starting a JIRA Project

To start JIRA project management, follow the steps below.

  1. Main page, click the Project Group Management icon of the project group. You will be taken to the Project Group Dashboard page.
  2. Click the JIRA Project menu on the Project Group Dashboard page. The JIRA Project screen appears.

Add JIRA project

To add a JIRA project, follow these steps.

  1. On the JIRA project screen, click the Add button. The Add JIRA project popup opens.
  2. Add JIRA Project In the popup window, after entering the JIRA URL and authentication information, click the Connection Test button.
  3. Select JIRA Project and click the Save button.
    ItemExplanation
    JIRA URLSelect the JIRA URL
    • A list of JIRA tools available in the project group is displayed.
    Tool Registration ShortcutIf you need to register a JIRA tool, you can go directly to the tool registration page.
    Authentication informationEnter authentication credentials.
    JIRA projectSelect JIRA project
    • A list of projects accessible based on the JIRA URL and authentication information is displayed.
    • Only projects for which you have administrator rights in JIRA can be selected.
    Table. JIRA Project Additional Input Items

Delete JIRA project

To delete a JIRA project, follow the steps below.

  1. On the JIRA Project screen, select the checkbox of the item you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
  2. Click the Confirm button in the confirmation popup to complete the deletion of the JIRA project.

2.12 - Release Note

DevOps Console

2025.07.01
FEATURE v1.16.0 Changes
  • Built-in user management and authentication features have been added.
    • Manage and authenticate users using DevOps IDP.
  • The Jenkins DevOps Plugin installation and update features have been added.
    • You can verify the installed Jenkins version, the installation status and version information of recommended plugins, and perform installation and updates.
  • From the tenant dashboard, you can download the billing base data in the status data as an Excel file.
2024.10.24
FEATURE v1.15.0 Changes
  • A supported Helm chart repository has been added.

    • You can now use the OCI standard Helm chart repository.
  • The pipeline feature has been added.

  • Other changes

    • A new item that can be viewed on the dashboard has been added.
2024.10.24
CHANGED v1.15.0 Changes
  • The permission management feature for deployment targets has been improved.
    • Deployment target(K8S cluster, namespace, VM server group) now has a permission request/approval feature added.
    • Note: Permission Request
  • The management and organization features for tools/templates have been improved.
    • It has been improved to allow the transfer of the organization that manages tools and templates (tenants, project groups).
  • Other changes
    • The supported versions of the image registry tool Harbor have been expanded. (~2.10)
    • It is no longer possible to create a Job directly in Jenkins. (Jobs can only be created through the DevOps Service)